Chevrolet - Blazer - Owners Manual - 1997 - 1997 (2)

REPRODUCTION The 1997 Chevrolet Blazer Owner’s Manual 1-1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “SIR” system. 2-1 Features and Controls This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle. 3- 1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tellsyou how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system. 4- 1 Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions. 5-1 Problems on the Road This section tells what to do if you have a problem while driving, such asa flat tire or overheated engine, etc. 6- 1 Service and Appearance Care Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good. 7-1 Maintenance Schedule This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use. 8- 1 Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications. It also gives you information on ”Reporting Safety Defects” on page8- 10. 9- 1 Index Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subjectin this ,manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read. i ) GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem. CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name BLAZER are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Division whenever it appears in this manual. Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be there if you ever need it when you‘re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it. Litho in U.S.A. C97 1 1 B First Edition ii We support voluntary technician certification. WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH Natlonal Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual: Aux propribtaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en franpis chez votre concessionaire ou au: DGN Marketing Services Ltd. 1500 Bonhill Rd. Mississauga, Ontario L5T IC7 “Copyright General Motors Corporation 1996 All Rights Reserved About Driving Your Vehicle Safety Warnings and Symbols As with other vehiclesof this type, failureto operate this You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. We use abox and the wordCAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. vehicle correctly may result in loss of control oran accident. Be sure to read the “on-pavement” and “off-road” driving guidelines in this manual. (See “Driving Guidelines” and “Off-Road Driving with your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” in the Index.) How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when theyfirst receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly. Index I A CAUTION: I These mean there is something thatcould hurt you or other people. In the caution area,we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt. A good place to lookfor what you need is the Index in the back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical listof what’s in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it. iii You will also find a circle with a slash through itin this book. This safety symbol means “Don’t,” “Don’t do this,” or “Don’t let this happen.” In the notice area,we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you whatto do to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals,you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warningsin different colors or in different words. You’ll also see warning labelson your vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. Vehicle Damage Warnings Also, in this book you will find these notices: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle. iv Vehicle Symbols These are someof the symbols you may find on your vehicle. For example, these symbols are used on an original battery: CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY A x These symbols have to do with your lamps: SPARK OR FLAME COULD EXPLODE BATTERY These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights: WINDSHIELD WIPER TURN SIGNALS FASTEN SEAT BELTS FLASHER AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES These symbols are on some of your controls: COOLANT TEMP DOOR LOCK UNLOCK PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING CAUSTIC BATTERY ACID COULD CAUSE BURNS These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven: POWER WINDOW EATERY CHARGING SYSTEM A WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BRAKE t' -I ENGINE OIL PRESSURE FOG LAMPS - FUSE $0 VENTILATING FAN 1 b -J ANTI-LOCK BRAKES * I LIGHTER (a) HORN SPEAKER WINDOW DEFOGGER ,\I/, Here are some other symbols you may see: e, FUEL )a( b la (@) V Model Reference This manual covers these models: Two-Door Utility vi ' Four-Door Utility Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you shouldnot do with air bags and safety belts. 1-2 1-8 1-12 1-13 1-13 1-20 1-26 1-26 1-26 Seats and Seat Controls Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts -- and the Answers How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Driver Position Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Right Front Passenger Position Center Front Passenger Position (4-Door Models) 1-28 1-31 1-34 1-35 1-37 1-44 1-47 1-47 1-48 Rear Seat Passengers Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults (4-Door Models) Center Rear Passenger Position (4-Door Models) Children ChiId Restraints Larger Children Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust them, and fold them up and down. Manual Front Seat I A CAUTION:. You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to ad,just a manual driver's seat while the vehicleis moving. The sudden movement could startleand confuse you, or make you push a pedal whenyou orrlg when don't want to. Adjust the driver's seat the vehicle is not moving. I Move the lever under the x. '2 , . . . I I I - front of the standard seat toward the driver's door to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release-the lever and try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place. Move the lever under the front of the easy entry seat up to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release the lever and try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place. 1-2 Manual Lumbar Support If you have this feature, there will be a knob on the outside of the driverand passenger bucket seats. Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support. Power Driver’s Seat (Option) If you have this feature, there willbe a control pad on your driver’s seat. To make the front of the seat moveup or down, use control A. To make the rear ofthe seat move up or down,use control C. Use control B to move the whole seat up, down, forward or backward. 1-3 Power Lumbar Control (Option) 1- If you have this control, it is located on the side o f the driver’s seat. Press and hold the front of the control until you have the desired lumbar support. To decrease lumbar support, press the rear of the control. 1-4 Reclining Front Seatbacks To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outer side Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it. PulI up on the lever and the seat will go to an upright position. A CAUTION: But don’t havea seatback reclinedif your vehicleis moving. Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their jobwhen you’re reclined like this. The shoulderbelt can’t do its job because it won’t be against yourbody. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lapbelt can’t do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright. Thensit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. 1-5 Head Restraints Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable on others. Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reducesthe chance of a neck injury in a crash. Your adjustable head restraint may also be tilted forward for greatercomfort. To return the seatback to the upright position, push the seatback all the way back until the latch catches. If the seatback was reclined before beingfolded forward, it will return to the reclined position. I A CAUTION: Seatback Latches I 1-6 If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked. Easy Entry Seat (2-DoorModels) Rear Seats The right front seatof your vehicle makes it easy to get in and out of the rear seat. Your vehicle has a folding rear seatwhich lets you fold the seatbacks down for more cargo space. 0 Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and the whole seat will slide forward. Move the seatback to its original position after someone gets into the rear seat area. Then move the seat rearward until it l o c k s . A CAUTION: If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked, it can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the person sitting there could be injured. After you’ve used it, be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat to be sure it is locked. Tilt the seatback completely forward again to get out. The rear seat release handles are in the upper center of the rear of the seatbacks. Push back on the seatbacks as you pull up on the handles. To raise the seatbacks, just lift up the seatbacks and push until they lock in the upright position. Push and pull on the seatbacks to check that the latches have locked in the upright position. If they haven’t, have them fixed immediately. 1-7 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. And it explains the Supplemental Intlatable Restraint (SIR), x air bag system. A CAUTION: Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too. 1-8 A CAUTION: It is extremely dangerous to ride ina cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. Your vehicle has alight that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.) Why Safety BeltsWork When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. A few crashes are mild,and some crashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them. people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. Take the simplest vehicle.Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels. After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! \. - 1-9 I t Put someone on it. 1-10 Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn‘t stop. 1 1 -- * " lE&€d.*.L-r_ 1 1 I The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ... i or the instrument panel ... Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts -- and the Answers Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? A: , e A e: A: or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That‘swhy safety belts make such good sense. 1-12 You cwuld be -- whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down.And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you c’au unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts? Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, butif you’re in an -- you and accident -- even one that isn’t your fault your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries of less than 40 mph and deaths occur at speeds (65 km/h). Safety belts arefor everyone. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special thingsto know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. Ifa child will be riding in your vehicle, see thepart of this manual called “Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. We’ll start with the driver position. Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system. Lap-Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’show to wear it properly. 1 . Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can situp straight. 1-13 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don't Ict it Sct twisted. Make w r c thc t - c l c w button on the buckle is posiititmed 50 y o u would be able to unbuckle the sat't'ty hclt quickly it' you ever had to. 5 . To make the lap part tight. pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up o n the shoulder belt. The lap partof the belt should beworn low and snug on the thighs. In a crash, this applies the hips, j'ust touching force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be less likely to slide underthe lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These partsof the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces. The safety beltlocks if there's a sudden stop or a crash. 1-15 @ What’s wrong with this? I A CAUTION: L You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. L A: I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I The shoulder belt is too loose. It won‘t give nzarly as much protection this way. 1-16 What’s wrong with this? 1 A CAUTION: You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at thepelvic bones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. 1-17 e.'' What's wrong with this? A CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. Ina crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren't as strong asshoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. 1-18 What’s wrong with this? ~~ A CAUTION: You can be seriously injuredby a twisted belt. In a crash,you wouldn’t have the full widthof the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it. A: The belt is twisted across the body. 1-19 Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System This part explainsthe Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) system or air bag system. ‘i Your vehicle has an air bag for the driver. Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system: A CAUTION: You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you have an air bag. Wearing your safety belt during a crashhelps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All air bags are designed to work with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all CAUTION: (Continued) -- To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. 1-20 CAUTION: (Continued) in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there’s an airbag for that person. -- A CAUTION: Air bags inflatewith great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to aninflating air bag, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with an back as you can while still air bag, and sit as far maintaining controlof your vehicle. AIR BAG There isan air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tellsyou if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information. 1-21 How the Air Bag System Works A CAUTION: If something is between the driver and theair bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object intothat person. The path of' an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don't put anything between an occupant and the air bag, and don't attach or put anything on or near the steeringwheel hub. Where is the air bag? The driver's air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel. 1-22 When should an air bag inflate? What makes an air bag inflate? An air bag is designed to inflatein a moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate only if the impact speedis above the system’s designed “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about 14 to 18 mph (23 to 29 kmh). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,so that it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes somethingthat will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold levelwill be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflatein rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant. In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle in is a crash. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag module inside the steering wheel. In any particular crash,no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were. Inflation is determinedby the angleof the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. How does anair bag restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel. The air bag supplements the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many typesof collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion not is toward the air bag. Air bags should neverbe regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then onlyin moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions. The air bag systemis designed to work properly undera wide range of conditions, including off-road usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving. 1-23 The air bag is designed to inflate only once. After it inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your airbag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include the air bag module and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. What will you see after an air bag inflates? After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some peoplemay not even realize the air bag inflated. Some componentsof the air bag module in the steering wheel hub will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. Therewill be some smoke and dust comingfrom vents in the deflated air bag. Air bag inflation doesn’t preventthe driver from seeing or from beingable to steer the vehicle. nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle. A CAUTION: When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after anair bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. 1-24 0 Your vehicle is equipped with it diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system. when the sensors are activated and driver’s safetybelt usage at deployment. 0 Let only qualified technicians work on yourair bag system. Improper service can meanthat your air bag system won’t work properly.See your dealerfor service. NOTICE: If you damage the cover for the driver’s air bag, the bag may not work properly. You may have to replace the air bag module. Do not open or break the air bag cover. Adding Equipment to Your Air The air bag affects how your vehicle should be serviced. Bag-Equipped Vehicle Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle There are partsof the air bag systemin several places around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your GM dealer and theGM Service Manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. A CAUTION: For up to two minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an air bagwhen it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape, or yellow connectors. They are probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures,and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so. ~ ~ ~~~~ ~ ~ The air bag system does not need regular maintenance. Q: If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bag from working properly? A: As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the air bag from working properly in a crash. @’ Is there anythingI might add to the frontof the vehicle that could keep the air bap from working properly? A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or height, they may keep theair bag system from working properly. Also, theair bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors. If you have any question about this, you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.) Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don't wear safety belts. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it's more likely that the fetus won't be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Right Front Passenger Position The right front passenger's safety belt works the same way as the driver's safety belt. See "Driver Position" earlier in this section. When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. I f it does, let it go back all the way and start again. Center Front Passenger Position (4-DoorModels) 1-26 Lap Belt If your vehicle has a frontbench seat, someone can sit in the center position. When y o u sit i n rhr center front seating position, you have a lap safety belt. which has no retractor. To make the belt longer. t i l t the latch plate and pull it along the belt. To make the belt shorter, pull its free endas shown until the belt issnug. Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender’’ at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-27 Rear Seat Passengers Lap-Shoulder Belt It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly. Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. Rear Seat Outside PassengerPositions 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. On four-door models, the shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 1-28 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. 1-29 m And you'd be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. Theseparts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or a crash. On four-door models, the safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. A CAUTION: The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. 1-30 You can be seriously hurtif your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides for Childrenand Small Adults (4-DOOr Models) Four-door models have rear shoulder belt comfort guides. This feature will provide added safety belt comfort for childrenwho have outgrown child restraints and for small adults. When installedon a shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head. There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfortfor children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’show to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt: To unlatch the belt,just push the buttonon the buckle. 1-31 Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip. 1-32 2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. n 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top. 4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as described in “Rear Seat OutsidePassenger Positions” earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze thebelt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate theguide and clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed. 1-33 Center Rear Passenger Position @-DoorModels) Lap Belt When you sit in the center rear seating position, you have a lap safety belt which has a retractor. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don't let it get twisted. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. 3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it. 1-34 Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained whilein a vehicle. Smaller Children andBabies I A CAUTION: 4. Position and release it the sameway as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckleis positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. Smaller childrenand babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraint will say whether itis the right type and size for your child. A very young child’s hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it should. Instead, thebelt will likely be over the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause serious or fatalinjuries. So, be sure that any childsmall enough for one is alwaysproperly restrained in a child or infant restraint. 1-35 CAUTION: (Continued) heavy you can't hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 2404b. (110 kg) force on your arms. The babv would be almost impossible to hold. Secure thebaby in an infant restraint. 1A CAUTION: Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn't weigh much until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so CAUTION: (Continued) -- 1-36 Child Restraints Where to Put the Restraint Be sure the child restraintis designed tobe used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label sayingthat it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Accident statisticsshow that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint ina rear seat outside position unless the child is an infant and you’re the only adult in the vehicle. In that case, you might want to secure the restraint in the right front seat where you can keep an eye onthe baby. Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructionson the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraintsuse the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraintto help reduce the chanceof personal injury. The instructions thatcome with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that. Wherever you install it, be sureto secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it. 1-37 Top Strap If your child restraint has it top strap, it should be anchored. Anchor brackets for the rear outside seat positions are located on the floor in the cargo area. 1-38 Don't use the front set of tie-down brackets. Anchor the top strap to the rearmost bracket on the same side of the vehicle as the child restraint. Once you have the top strap anchored. you'll be ready to secure the child restraint itself. Securing a Child Restraint ina Rear Outside Seat Position You’ll be using thelap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 3. Pick up the latch plate, andrun the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder belt goesin front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint. 1-39 I 5 . Pull the rest o f the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor t o set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down onthe chld restraint. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint. justunbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt wilI move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-40 Center Seat Positions(4-Door Models) Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Don’t use child restraints in these positions. The restraints won’t work properly. You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strapif the child restrainthas one. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the childrestraint. 1-41 I r .." 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-42 5 . Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. If you’re using a bucket seat, adjust the seat forward until the lap portion of the safety belt holds the restraint firmly. But don’t move it any more than needed to tighten the lap belt. I 6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. Larger Children If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and b oet the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly. Children who aren't buckled up can be thrown out in a crash. Children who aren I ouckled up can strike other people who are. Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle's safety belts. 1-44 - /d CAUTION: Never do this. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’t properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, thetwo children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time. Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but thechild is so small that the shoulderbelt is very closeto thechild’s face or neck? A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a rear outside position of a four-door model, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck. you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one. 1-45 A CAUTION: Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder partis behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal in,juries. Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips. just touching the child‘s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. 1-46 Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder Iight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. But if a safety beltisn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer will orderyou an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coatyou will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you.The extender will be just foryou, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it. and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.To wear it, just attach it to the regular safetybelt. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.) 1-47 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you've had a crash, do you need new belts'? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the belts were stretched, a s they would be if worn during a more severe crash. then you need new belts. If you ever see alabel on the driver's safety belt buckle that says to replace the buckle assembly. be sure to do so. Then the new buckle assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision. If belts are cut or darnagea,replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn't being used at the time of the collision. I f an air bag inflates, you'll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section. CAUTION ATTENTION must be replaced. 1-48 1 & NOTES 1-49 1-50 Section 2 FeaturesandControls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional featureson your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained arethe instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem. 2-2 2-6 2-9 2- 12 2-13 2- 13 2- 15 2- 17 2-18 2-2 1 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-29 2-30 2-33 Keys Keyless Entry System (If Equipped) Endgatekiftgate Theft New Vehicle “Break-In” Ignition Positions Starting Your Engine Engine Coolant Heater (Option) Automatic Transmission Operation Manual Transmission Locking Rear Axle All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Four-wheel Drive (If Equipped) Parking Brake Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic Transmission Models Only) Shifting Out of PARK (P) (Automatic Transmission) 2-33 2-34 2-34 2-35 2-36 2-38 2-45 2-49 2-63 2-63 2-64 2-67 2-72 Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission Models Only) Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You’re Parked (Automatic Transmission) Windows Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever Exterior Lamps Mirrors Accessory Power Outlets (If Equipped) Sunroof (If Equipped) Universal Transmitter (If Equipped) Instrument Panel Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators Keys A CAUTION: Leaving young children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't leave the keys in a vehicle with young children. d 2-2 This vehicle has one double-sided keyfor the ignition, endgate, spare tire lock (two-door vehicles) and door locks.It will fit with either side up. When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key code number. The key code number tells your dealeror a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have new ones rnude cusily using this number. Your selling dealer should also have this number. I NOTICE: Your vehicle has anumber of newfeatures that can help prevent theft. But you canhave a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if youever lock your keys inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have extra keys. Door Locks You can use your key to unlock your door from the outside. To lock your door from the inside, slide the lever on your inside door rearward. A CAUTION: Unlocked doors canbe dangerous. Passengers especially children can easily open the doors andfall out. When a door is locked, the inside handlewon't open it. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slowdown or stop your vehicle. This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren'tlocked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle. -- -- I There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. You can use the Keyless Entry System, if you have this option. 2-4 To unlock the door, slide the lever on your inside door forward. You will see a red area on the lever. Power Door Locks (If Equipped) If your vehicle has power door locks, the switch is located on the armrest. Press LOCK to lock all the doors at once. To unlock the doors, press the raised area next to the key symbol. On four-door models, the leveron eacn rear aoor worm only that door’s lock. Rear Door Security Lock 4s With this feature, you can lock the rear doorsso they can’t be opened from the inside by passengers. Move the lockup to lock the doors and down to release the door locks. Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and close the door. Keyless Entry System(If Equipped) If your vehicle has this option, you can lock andunlock your doors and rear endgate from up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle. Your Keyless Entry System operates on a radio frequency subject toFederal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industryand Science Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1 ) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received. including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to this system other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. 2-6 This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this: 0 Check to determine if battery replacement or resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions that follow. e Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather. e Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may be blocking the signal. Takea few steps to the leftor right, and try again. e If you're still having trouble. see your GM dealer or a qualified technician for service. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Operation Battery Replacement When you press UNLOCK, the driver’s door and endgate will unlock automatically.If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds, all doors will unlock. Press LOCK to lock all the doors. Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years. Press the REAR button twice within3 1/2 seconds to unlock and unlatch the rear glass. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the transmission must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If your vehicle has a manual transmission, you must engage the parking brake. Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen,a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. Whenthe dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only two transmitters matched to it. You can tell the batteryis weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get closeto your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the battery. NOTICE: When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry.Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter. 2-7 To replace the battery in the Keyless Entry transmitter: L &. Resynchronization Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security method used by this system. The transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording and playing back the signal from the transmitter. To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your vehicle and simultaneously press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for at least five seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your dealer for service. I . Insert a dime in the slot between the covers of the transmitter housing near the key ring hole. Remove the bottom by twisting the dime. 2 . Remove and replace the battery with a three volt CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side down. 3. Align the covers and snap them together. 4. Check the operation of the transmitter. 2-8 EndgateLiftgate A CAUTION: It can be dangerous to drive with the rear window, endgate or liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It cancause unconsciousness and even death. If you must drivewith the rear window, endgate or liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the rear window, endgate or liftgate: Make sure all windows are shut. Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system toits highest speed withthe setting on VENT. That w ill force outsideair into your vehicle. See “Comfort Controis” in the Index. If you have air outlets onor under the instrument panel, open them all the way. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. Endgate Mounted Spare If your vehicle has an endgate-mounted spare tire carrier, you must move the carrier arm out of the way to open the glass. Here’s how to move the arm: d I 1. Squeeze the release handle to free the carrier arm. 2 . Swing the carrier arm away from the endgate. You may need to give it a slight tug. 3. To latch the carrier arm, swing it toward the endgate. 2-9 Endgate Release To open a mechanical lock system from the outside, insert the key into the lock and turn i t counterclockwise to unlock the glass. Reach inside the endgate to lift the handle and open the endgate. The endgate and glass will automatically lock when shut. To open a power lock system from the outside, insert the key into the lock button and turn counterclockwise. All doors will unlock. You may also use the keyless entry system,or the power door locks, if you're vehicle is so equipped. When doors are unlocked, press the button to open the glass. The endgate can be opened without a key if the driver's door is unlocked. The endgate glass will not release if the vehicle is in gear. To lock a power lock system from the outside, insert the key into the lock button and turn clockwise. All doors will lock. 2-10 Liftgate Release Remote Rear Glass Release This button on the driver's side of the steering column allows you to release the rear glass from inside the vehicle. REAR HATCH Insert the key in the lock button and turn counterclockwise. All doors will unlock. You may also use the power lock switchesor the keyless entry system, if your vehicle is so equipped. Use the handle to open the liftgate. Press the buttonto open the glass whenthe liftgate is closed. The glass won't release if the vehicle is in gear. Emergency Release for Opening EndgateLiftgate I 1. Peel back or slit the carpet locally to expose the access hole in the trim panel. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission,your shift lever must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (,N) for the release to work. i i 2. If you have a manual transmission, either with or without the Keyless Entry option, you must apply your parking brake before you can open the endgate glass. 1 ' ' ' 2 ~ Use a thin screwdriver to reach through the access holes in both the trim panel and the hardware cover. Pry the release lever toward the passenger's side until the glass latch pops open. 3. Reattach the carpet securely. - 4 4 Theft Parking at Night Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities. Although your vehicle has a numberof theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help. Park in a lighted spot, close allwindows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight. Put them in a storage area, or take them with you. Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so don‘t do it. When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, you’II hear a tonereminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this. Your steering wheel will be locked. and so will your ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking your key out also locks your transmission. And remember to lock the doors. 2-12 Parking Lots If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle. it’s best to lock it up and take your keys. But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle? Put your valuables in a storage area, like your glove box. Lock all the doors except the driver’s. New Vehicle “Break-In” Ignition Positions I NOTICE: Use the key to turn the ignition switchto five different positions. ~ ~~ ~ ~ Your modern vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate “break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you followthese guidelines: 0 Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for thefirst 500 miles (805 km). 0 Don’t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first500 miles (805 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts. 0 Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings. 0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towinga Trailer’’ in the Index for more information. -- C -- A E ACCESSORY (A): ACCESSORY lets you use things like theradio and the windshield wiperswhen the engine is off. Push in the key and turn it toward you. Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was before you inserted the key. 2-13 NOTICE: Don’t operate accessories in theACCESSORY position for long periods of time. Prolonged operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY position could drain your battery andprevent you from starting your vehicle. LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK. OFF (C): This position lets youturn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel. Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine isoff (for example, if your vehicle is being towed). RUN (D): This is the position for driving. START (E):This starts your engine. 2-14 A CAUTION: On manual transmissionvehicles, turning thekey to LOCK will lock the steeringcolumn and result in a loss of ability to steerthe vehicle. This could engine cause a collision. If you need to turn the off while the vehicle is moving, turn thekey only to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while the vehicle is moving. NOTICE^^' _.. Y!’> .‘sa !- If your key seemsstuck in LOCK and you can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correctkey; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and rightwhile youturn the key hard. But turn thekey only withyour hand. Using a tool to force it could break thekey or the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service. Starting Your Engine Key Release Button ac The key cannot be removed from the ignition of manual transmission vehicles unless the key release button is used. 9.- To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles, turn the key to the OFF position. Then turn the key to the LOCK position while pressing the key release button down at the same time. Pull the key straight out. Automatic Transmission Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Your engine won't startin any other position -- that's a safety feature.To restart when you're already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. I NOTICE: Don't try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is moving. If you do, you couId damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped. On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the key to LOCK and pull i t straight out. 2-15 Manual Transmission The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL (N).Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down -- that’s a safety feature. 1 . Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. NOTICE: Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. 2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in START. If it doesn‘t start in 10 seconds, push the accelerator pedal all the way down for five more seconds. or until it starts. 2-16 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), wait 15 seconds and start over. When the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator pedal. NOTICE: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engineoperates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t. your engine might not perform properly. If you ever have to have yourvehicle towed, see the partof this manual thattells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. Engine Coolant Heater (Option) In very cold weather, 0°F (- 18O Cj or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier startingand better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. To Use the Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. A CAUTION: Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord asit was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof trying to list everything here. we ask that you contact your GM dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can giveyou the best advice for that particular area. ~ 2-17 Automatic Transmission Operation Your automatic transmission may have a shift lever located on the console between the seats or on the steering column. There are several different positions for your shift lever. If your vehicle is equipped with a coiunm shift lever, it features an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument cluster. This display must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of the PARK (P) position. This means that if your key is in the OFF position, but not locked, there will be a small current drain on your battery which could discharge your battery over a period of time. If you need to leave your key in the ignition in the OFF position for an extended period, it is recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to prevent discharging your battery. PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can‘tmove easily. 2-18 A CAUTION: It is dangerous toget out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicie won’t move, even when you’re onfairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). If you have four-wheel drive, yourvehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) if your transfercase is in NEUTRAL (N). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear, two-wheel high (2HI) orfour-wheel high (4HI) orfour-wheel low (4LO) not in NEUTRAL (Nj. See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. --- -- Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) range before starting the engine. Your vehicle has a brake-transmission shift interlock.You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in the RUN position. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever-- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) (press the button in on the console shift lever)as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index. REVERSE (R):Use this gear toback up. NOTICE: Shifting to REVERSE(R)while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped. To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see “Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice orSnow” in the Index. NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels.To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. I A CAUTION: Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)while your engine is “racing” (running athigh speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmlyon the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing. I NOTICE: Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty. 2-19 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0): This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you’re: Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down. Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power. AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@jshould not be used when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load. driving on steep hills, or for off-road driving. Select DRIVE (D) when operating the vehicle under any of theseconditions. DRIVE (D): This position is also used for normal driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@). You should use DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills or winding roads or for off-road driving. SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on. 2-20 You can also use SECOND (2) for starting your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces. FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector lever is put in FIRST ( 1 ) while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into FIRST (1) until the vehicle is going slowly enough. I NOTICE: If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if youwere stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transmission. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there withonly the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transmission. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill. Manual Transmission Operation 5-Speed Here’s how to operate your transmission: FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal andshift into FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. You can shift into FIRST(1) when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST(1), put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1). SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly letup on the clutch pedal asyou press the accelerator pedal. THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3,4 and 5): Shift into THIRD(3),FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way you do for SECOND ( 2 ) . Slowly letup on the clutch pedalas you press the acceleratorpedal. This is your shift pattern. To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shiftto NEUTRAL (N). 2-21 NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or idle your engine. Shift Light If you have a manual transmission, you have a SHIFT light. REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal, wait about six seconds, then shift into REVERSE (R). Then let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. NOTICE: Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission. Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, for parking your vehicle. SHIFT This light will show you when to shift to the next higher gear for bestfuel economy. When this light comeson, you can shift to the next higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift when the light comes on. While you accelerate. it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift. 2-22 A CAUTION: If you skip more than one gear when you downshift, you couldlose control of your vehicle. And you could injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down more than one gear when you downshift. All-Wheel Drive(If Equipped) If your vehicle has all-wheel drive,your engine’s driving power is sent to all fourwheels for extra traction. This is like four-wheel drive,but there is no lever or switch to engage or disengagethe front axle. It is fully automaticand adjusts itself as needed for road conditions. Four-wheel Drive (If Equipped) If your vehicle has four-wheel driveand is equipped with a manual transmission, disregard the shift light when the transfer case is in 4LO. Locking Rear Axle If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, the locking feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle. If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction. To shift out of two-wheel drive and into four-wheel drive, move the transfer case shift lever to 4HI or 4LO. You should use 2HI for most normal driving conditions. NOTICE: Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle’s drivetrain. 2-23 Manual Transfer Case An indicator light near the lever shows you the transfer case settings: If your four-wheel-drive vehicle has the manual transfer case, the transfer case shift lever is on the floor next to the driver. Use this lever to shift intoand out of four-wheel drive. 2HI 0 4HI 0 N SET PARK BRAKE 4LO 2-24 The front axle portionof the diagram on the indicator will light up when you shift into four-wheel drive. A slight delay between shiftingand the pattern’s lighting is normal. If the pattern does not lightup, or if the front axle lights do not go outafter you shift out of four-wheel drive, have your dealer check your system. Turn the INT LIGHTS switch locatedto the right of your headlamp switchto dim your transfer case indicator light when your headlamps or parking lamps are on. This will also cause your instrumentpanel lights to dim. 2HI: This setting is for driving inmost street and 4LO: This setting also engagesyour front axle to give you extra traction and provides extra gear reduction. You may never need 4LO. It sends the maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud or deep snow and climbing or descending steephills. You can shift from 2HI to 4HI orfrom 4HI to 2HI while the vehicle is moving. Do not press the transfer case shift leverbutton when shifting from 2HI to 4HI or from 4HI to 2HI. To shift your transfer case intoN SET PARK BRAKE: highway situations. Your front axle isnot engaged in two-wheel drive. 1. Stop the vehicle and shift your transmission into NEUTRAL (N). 4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use 4HIwhen you need extra traction, such as on snowyor icy roads, or in most 2. Set the parking brake. Your vehicle can roll unless the brakes are applied. off-road situations. 3. Pull the transfer case shift leverinto N SET PARK BRAISE. N SET PARK BRAKE: Shift to this neutral setting only when your vehicle needs to be towed. 2-25 To shift intoor out of 4LO: 1. The vehicle must be moving less than 3 mph (4.8 k m h ) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) for an automatic transmission.For a manual transmission, the clutch pedal must be engaged. The preferred method for shiftinginto or out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Electronic Transfer Case (U' Equipped) . . ... If your four-wheel-drive vehicle has the electronic transfer case,the transfer case switches are above 2. Press the transfer case shift button and shift in one continuous motion. Don't pause in N SET PARK BRAKE as you shift into or out of 4L0, or your gears could clash. Remember that driving in 4HI or 4LO may reduce fuel economy. Also. driving in four-wheel drive on dry pavement could cause your tires to wear faster and make your transfer case harder to shift and reduce powertrain longevity. Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. You can choose among three driving settings: 2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. When this lamp is lit, it is about one-half as bright as the others. 4HI: This setting engages your frontaxle to help drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most off-road situations. 2-26 4LO: This setting also engagesyour front axle togive you extra traction.You may never need 4LO. It sends the maximumpower to all fourwheels. You might choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud or deep snowand climbing or descending steep hills. Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle in for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed. Shifting from 2HI to 4HI Press and release the 4HI switch. This canbe done at any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically. Shifting from 4HI to 2HI Press and release the 2HI switch. This canbe done at any speed. and the front axle will unlock automatically. Shifting from 2HI or JHI to 4LO To shift tiom ZHI or -!HI to 4L0, the vehicle must be stopped or mo\fing less than 3 mph (4.8 k m k ) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal engaged in vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. The preferred method for shifting into4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO switch. You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal. If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving,the 4LO indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 k m k ) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal engaged. On automatic transmission equipped vehicles,if your transfer case doesnot shift into4L0, your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment. With your transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the 4LO switch. While the 4LO indicator light is flashing, shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the 4LO indicator light remains illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4L0, but you should take your vehicle in for serviceto restore normal operation. 2-27 Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2H1, your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 k m h ) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal engaged. The preferredmethod for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI switch. You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shiftingyour transmission into gear or releasingthe clutch pedal. If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL ( N ) or the clutch pedal engaged. 2-2s On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your transfer case does not shift into 4H1, your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment. With your transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the 4HI switch. While the 4HI indicatorlight is flashing, shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the 4HI indicator lightremains illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4HI. but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore normal operation. Parking Brake To set the parkingbrake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push downthe parking brake pedal with your left foot. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. To release the parkingbrake hold the regular brake pedal down. . . Pull the BRAKE RELEASE lever. It is located on the bottom driver’s side of the instrument panel. NOTICE: r Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakesto overheat. You may have to replace them, and you couldalso damage other parts of your vehicle. If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving. 2-29 Column Shift Lever Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic Transmission Models Only) 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake. A CAUTION: 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position ‘likethis: ~~ It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle . ,. if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you have fourwheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P).So, be sure the transfercase isin a drive gear not in NEUTRAL (N). If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a ’Iltailer” in theIndex. I -- 2-30 0 Pull the lever toward you. Console Shift Lever F 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake. 2. Move the shtft lever into PARK (P) position like this: 0 Move the lever up as far as it will go. 3. If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL (N). 4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. 5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle isin PARK (P). Hold in the button on the lever. Push the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle. 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehcle with the key, your vehicle is in PARK (P). Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running (Automatic Transmission Models Only) I A CAUTION: It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll,even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL (N). And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could be injured. Don't leave yourvehicle with the engine running unlessyou have to. -- If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your 2-32 parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you've moved the shift lever into the PARK (P) position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you (or pressing the button on a console shift lever). If you can, i t means that the shift lever wasn't fully locked into PARK (P). Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) If you are parking on a hill and you don't shift your transmission into PARK (PI properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force onthe parlung pawl in the tr'msmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift Icver out of PARK (P). This is called "torque lock." To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver's seat. To find out how, see "Shifting Into PARK (P)" in the Index. When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. I f torque lock does occur. you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so y o u can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). Shifting Outof PARK (P) (Automatic Transmission) Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission Models Only) Your vehicle has a brake-transmission shift interlock. You have to fully apply your regular brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in the RUN position. See “Automatic Transmission Operation” in the Index. Before you get out of your vehicle, turnoff your engine, put your manual transmission in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parking brake. If you cannot shift outof PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever -- push the shift lever allthe way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you want (you must press the shift leverbutton if you have the console shift lever). If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever, be sure your transfer case is in a drive gear. Your vehicle could roll if it isn’t. If you are parking on ahill, or if your vehicle is pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. If you ever hold the brake pedal downbut still can’t shift outof PARK (P), try this: 1. Turn the key to OFF. 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4. 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N). 4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drivegear you want. 5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can. 2-33 Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust A CAUTION: IA CAUTION: Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Don't park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn. 2-34 Engine exhaust cankill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can't see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. You might have exhaust coming ini f Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. Your vehicle was damaged in collision. a Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the roador over road debris. a Repairs weren't done correctly. 0 Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into your vehicle: Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO; and 0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately. Running Your Engine While You’re Parked (Automatic Transmission) It’s better not topark with the engine running. But if ever have to, here are some things to know. A CAUTION: Idling the engine with the air system control off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle (seethe earlierCaution under “Engine Exhaust”). Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle evenif the fan switchis at the highest setting. One place this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running. Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. (See “Blizzard” in theIndex.) -- 9- I A CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shiftlever is not fully in PARK(P)with the parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. Don’t leave your vehicle whenthe engineis running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly level ground, always set your parkingbrake and move the shiftlever to PARK(P). If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL (N). Always set your parking brake. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see ”Towing a Trailer” in the Index. 2-35 Windows Manual Windows Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your manual side door windows. Power Windows (If Equipped) If you have the optional power windows, the controls are on each of the side doors. Your power windows will only work when the ignition has been turned to RUN. The driver's door has a switch for the passenger windows as well. Press the side of the switch with the down arrow to lower the window. Press the side of the switch with the up arrow to raise the window. Express-Down Window The driver's window switch has an express-down feature that allows you to lower it without holding the window switch. Hold the driver's window switch down for more than a half a second to activate the express-down feature. Lightly tap the switch to open the window slightly.The express-down feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the up arrow end of the switch. 2-36 Lockout Switch Swing-Out Windows (2-Door Only) If your vehicle has rear swing-out windows, unlatch them at theirclasps and push out on the glass to open them. When you close the window, be sure the latch catches. Four-door vehicles have a lockout feature to prevent passengers from operating power windows.It is located on the driver's door. Press LOCK to activate this feature. Press NORM and the windows return to normal operation. Horn To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad. 2-37 Tilt Wheel (If Equipped) Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever If you have the tilt steering wheel. you should adjust the steering wheel before you drive. I You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level. then release the lever to lock the wheel in place. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The level- on the left side of the steering column includes your: Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator 0 Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer Windshield Wipers Windshield Washer Cruise Control (If Equipped) 2-38 ’krn and Lane ChangeSignals The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions.These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the turn is finished,the lever will return automatically. An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, checkthe fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers’’ in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs. If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lamps, a differentturn signal flasher is used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they are working. Headlamp Highkow Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low-beam to high or high to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you. Then release it. To signal a lane change. just raise or lower the lever until the ;lrrocv starts to tlash. Hold it there until you complete your 1mc change. The lever will return by itself when you rclt.ast: i t . 1 When the high beams are on,.this indicator light on the instrument panel will also be on. As you signal ;1 turn or LI lane change, if the arrows don’t flash but just stay 011. ;I signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers w o n ‘ t see your turn signal. 2-39 Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it. Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they're frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. Windshield Washer At the top of the multifunction lever there's a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol and PUSH. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, press the paddle. The wipers will clearthe window and then either stop or return to your preset speed. For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes. hold the band on MIST longer. You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The closer to LOW. the shorter the delay. For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away from you to the LOW position. For high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers. move the band to the OFF position. 2-40 I A CAUTION: In freezing weather,don't use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid canform ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. Rear Window WasherIWiper WASH The rear window wiper operates with a constant five second delay when the rear wiper switch is in the ON position. If the rear glass is opened, the wiper arm will automatically park on the endgate. When the glass is completely closed, the wiper will resume the delay mode. To wash the window, press and hold ON. The wipers will continue to work after you release the switch. Press OFF to turn the wiper off. REAR WIPER The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the windshield washer. However, the rear window washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer. If you can wash your windshield but not your rear window, check your fluid level. This switch is located on the instrument panel. 2-41 Cruise Control (If Equipped) With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 krdh). If you have an automatic transmission and you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off. If you have a manual transmission and you apply yourbrakes or push the clutch pedal, the cruise control will shut off. 2-42 A CAUTION: Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou can't drive safely at a steady speed. So, don't use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control. Don't use cruise control on siippery roads. Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed 1A Suppose you set your cruise controlat a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off the cruise control. But you don't need to reset it. CAUTION: If you leave yourcruise control switch on when you're not usingcruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don't want to. You could be startled and even losecontrol. Keep the cruise control switch OFF until you want to use it. I Once you're going about 25 mph (40 k m h ) or more, you can move the cruise control switch fromON to WA for about a half a second. 1. Move the cruise control switch to ON. 2 . Get up to the speed you want. 3. Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it. You'll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there. Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A longer than a half a second,the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. You could be startled and even lose control.So unless you want to go faster, don't hold the switch at WA. 2-43 Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Controi Using Cruise Controlon Hills There are two ways to go to a higher speed: How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed. load and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills. you may want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course. applying the brake takes you out of cruise control.Many drivers find this to be too rnuch trouble and don't use cruisecontrol on steep hills. Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Press the button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You'll now cruise at the higher speed. Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want. and then release the switch. (To increase your speed in very small amounts. move the switch to R/A. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.) Reducing SpeedWhile Using Cruise Control Press in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want. then release it. To slow down in very small amounts, press the button for less than a half a second. Each time you do this. you'll go 1 mph ( I .6 kndh) slower. Passing Another VehicleWhile Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal tu increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal. your vehicle \vi11 slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. 2-44 Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch pedal, if you have a manual transmission. Move the cruise switch to OFF. Erasing Speed Memory When you turn oft' the cruise control or the ignition. your cruise control set speed memory is erased. Press the top switchwith the parking lamps symbol on it to turn on: Exterior Lamps : aD 0 Parking Lamps 0 Sidemarker Lamps 0 Taillamps 0 License Plate Lamps 0 Instrument Panel Lights 0 Transfer Case Indicator Light (if you have one) ' .- . . I . - * Press the bottom switch with the master lampssymbol on it to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps. Press the side of the switch marked OFF to turn off your lamps. The switches are on the left side of your instrument panel. 2-45 Lamps On Reminder A reminder tone will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are turned on and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY. To turn the tone off, press the OFF switch. Daytime RunningLamps Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions. but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset. The DRL system will make your headlamps come onat reduced brightness when: the ignition is on, the headlamp switch is off and the parking brake is released. 2-46 When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either. When it begins to get dark, your DRL indicator light is a reminder to turn your headlamp switch on. The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come on. When you turn the headlamp switch off, the regular lamps will go off, and your headlamps will change to the reduced brightness of DRL. To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it. Fog Lamps (If Equipped) I . . $0OFF FOG LAMPS Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking lamps orlow-beam headlamps must be on foryour fog lamps to work. The fog lamp switch is on the instrument panel under the lamps switches. Pressthe side of the switch with the fog lamp symbolto turn the fog lamps on. Press OFF to turn them off. A light will glow in the switch when the fog lamps are on. Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turningon your headlamps. Fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the fog lamps will come on again. Interior Lamps Brightness Control Turn the switch next to the headlamp switch up to make your instrument panel and transfer case lights brighter. Turn the switchall the way up to turn on the interior lamps. Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped) Press the buttonnear each lamp on the overhead console to turn the reading lamps on and off. The lamps can be swiveled to point in the desired direction. If you have the miniconsole, press the lens on each reading lamp to turn it on or off. 2-47 Front Map Lamps (If Equipped) Dome Lamps If your vehicle has optional front map lamps, they are located on the inside rearview mirror. They will automatically come on for approximately 20 seconds when either front door is opened or unlocked with the Keyless Entry System, if so equipped. or until the ignition key is turned to RUN or ACCESSORY. The lamps will also stay on for approximately 15 seconds after you exit the vehicle. The rear dome lamp has a switch that lets you turn it on from the rear of the vehicle. They will also stay on for I5 seconds when the INT LIGHTS switch on the instrument panel is turned on then off, while the ignition is off. You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing the switch near each lamp. Press the side of the switch with the lamp symbol to turn on the front and rear dome lamps. Pressing the other side of the switch will turn the cargo area dome lamp off, even when the endgate or liftgate and doors are open. 2-48 Mirrors Outside Manual Adjust Mirror Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of your vehicle. You can fold them before enteringa car wash. Pull the mirrors in toward the vehicle. Push the mirrors back out when finished. Power Remote Control Mirror The control is located on the driver's door armrest.Turn the control to L or R to choose the mirror, then press the arrows on the outside switch ring to adjust the mirror. Press the tab under the mirror to reduce glare from headlamps behind you. 2-49 Convex Outside Mirror Overhead Console(If Equipped) Your passenger’s sidemirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat. A CAUTION: A convex mirrorcan make things(like other vehicles) look farther away than they reallyare. If you cut too sharplyinto the right lane,you could hit a vehicleon your right. Checkyour inside mirroror glance over your shoulderbefore changing lanes. Storage Compartments Glove Box To open your glove box, squeeze the lever at the top of the glove box and lower the door. Two cup depressions are provided for your convenience. but the glove box should not be open while driving. 2-50 The overhead console includes reading lamps, a compartment for a garage dooropener, a temperature and compass display and a storage compartment for sunglasses. Reading Lamps Installing a Garage Door Opener If you have a garage door opener, the front overhead compartment canbe used to conveniently store the opener. To install the garagedoor opener, first openthe compartment doorby pressing the latch forward. Peel the protective backing from the hook and loop patch. I The lamps can alsobe swiveled to point in the desired direction. ‘I Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener, as close to the center of the opener as possible. Center the garage door opener activation button over the console doorbutton and press the opener firmly into place. 2-51 Now, with the Compartment door closed, press the button again to make sure the garage door opener operates properly. The pegs inside the compartment door are used to make sure the button on the compartment door will contact the control button on the garage door opener. A I Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener operates with the compartment door closed when you press the button. 2-52 With the garage door opener positioned properly and the right number of pegs in place, you should only have to press the button slightly to operate the opener. Adjust the position of the garage door opener and add or remove pegs, as needed, until the opener operates properly. Temperature and Compass Display Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON/OFF switch. Display the temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit (English) or Celsius (metric) by pressing the U S N E T switch. Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle, the temperature indicated will be the last outside temperature recorded with the ignition on. If the outside temperature is 37 OF (3 O C) or lower when you turn on the ignition, ICE will appear on the display. This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may be icy, and that appropriate precautions should be taken. The outside air temperature and the compass are displayed at the front of the overhead console. The control switches are located to the left of the display. The compass is self-calibrating. so it does not need to be manually set. However, when your vehicle is new, the compass may function erratically. If it does, CAL (Calibration) will appear on the display. To correct the problem, drive in a complete 360" circle three times, and the compass will function normally. 2-53 2. Press and hold both the ON/OFF and the USMET switches. The displaywill go off. 3. After five seconds, VAR CAL will appear on the display. When it does, release both buttons. 4. Press USMET until your zone number appears on the display. 5. Press ON/OFF to enter your zone number. Your variance is now set. Driver Information System (If Equipped) This system displays the outside air temperature, compass direction and trip information in the overhead console. Variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north. In some areas, the difference between the two can be great enough to cause false compass readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location: 1. Find your location on the zone map. Note your zone number. 2-54 The USMET (United Statedmetric) button allows you to switch the display between the English and metricsystem. The MODE button can be used to toggle between three modes of operation: OFF?COMPEEMP and TRIP. OFF: This turns the system off. COMP/TEMP: The display provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. The compassis self-calibrating, so it does not need to be manually set. However, if C (Calibration) is displayed, the compasswill need to be calibrated. You may also place the compassin a noncalibrated mode by pressing and holding the MODE andUSMET buttons simultaneously whilein the COMP/TEMP mode. After about 10 seconds, the compass will display C and you can release the buttons. Drive the vehiclein a complete360" circle threetimes at a speedof less than 5 mph (8 km/h), and the compasswill function normally. Once the calibration is complete, the display will return to a compass reading. Variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north. In some areas,the difference between the two canbe great enoughto cause false compass readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to set the variance foryour particular location: 1. Find your location on the zone map earlier in this section. Note your zone number. 2. Press and hold both the MODE and the US/MET buttons in the COMPREMP mode. 3. After five seconds,the compass will acknowledge the variation mode by displaying the current zone number. When it does, release both buttons. 4. Press USMET until your zone number appears on the display. 5. Press MODE to enter your zone number. Your variance is now set and the display will return to the COMP/TEMPmode. TRIP: Once in the TRIP mode, pressing the MODE button will step you through the following TRIP functions: AVG ECON: The average fuel economy since the last reset is displayed. INST ECON: Instantaneous fuel economy for the last secondof driving is displayed. RANGE: The display indicates the estimated distance that can be travelled with the remaining fuel in the tank, based on the fuel economy forthe last few hours of driving. FUEL USED: The fuel used since the last reset is displayed. AVG SPEED: The average speed since the last reset is displayed. To reset the trip computer, press the MODE and USMET buttons simultaneously for at least two seconds. All functions will be displayed for half a second once the system is reset. Reset can only be performed in the AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes. All three modes are reset simultaneously. 2-55 Sunglasses Storage Compartment Front Storage Area .... 56: The console has a sunglasses storage compartment. Door Storage You will find a storage compartment on each of the front doors. Four-door models have storage pockets and cupholders on rear doors. 2-56 Tf your vehicle has this console compartment, squeeze the front lever while lifting the top to open it. You can store cassettes in the slots i n the front of the compartment. If you have a compact disc player. you may store compact discs inside the console. Convenience Net (If Equipped) If your vehicle hasthe center armrest compartment, lift the cover to expose the storage area which includes slots for cassettesand a coinholder. A storage compartment under your radio may be used to hold small items. You may havea convenience net in the rearof your vehicle to help keep small items, like gloves and light clothing in place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts. The net is not designed to retain these items during off-road use. The net is not for larger, heavier items. The convenience net is anchored to the endgate door. Attach the upper loops to the retainers on either side of the endgate opening (the label should be in the upper passenger side corner, visible from the rear of vehicle). Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie downs on the floor. Roll-Up Cargo Cover (If Equipped) Cargo Tie Downs If you have the optional cargo cover, you can use it to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the posts into the sockets on the inside trim panel on the passenger's side of the vehicle to secure it. I A CAUTION: An improperly stored cargo cover couldbe thrown about the vehicle duringa collision or sudden maneuver.You or others could be injured. If you remove the cover,always store it outside of the vehicle. When youput it back, always be sure that itis securely reattached. 2-58 There are four cargo tie downs in the rear that allow you to strap cargo in and keep it from moving inside the vehicle. Luggage Carrier (If Equipped) A CAUTION: If you try to carrysomething on top of your vehicle that is longer or wider than theluggage carrier like paneling, plywood, a mattress, and so forth the wind can catch itas you drive along. This can causeyou to lose control. What you are carryingcould be violently torn off, and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision, and of course damage yourvehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like thisinside. But, never carry something longeror wider than the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle. --- The luggage carrierhas slats, side rails and crossrails attached to the roof to secure cargo. The moveable tie downs, attached to the side rails, should be used to secure loadsto the luggage carrier. Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with your luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment. These are available throughyour GM dealer. 2-59 You can adjust the crossrails to handle different sized loads. Just loosen the slider knobs at each end of the crossrail and move them to where you want them. Make sure both sides of the crossrail are even. then tighten the slider knobs. Be sure the cargo is properly loaded. Follow these guidelines: Carrying small, heavy loads on the roof is not recommended. Tie the load to the moveable tie down (two per each side of the side rails). Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding. Remove the center rubber strips in the crossrails and attach the GM accessory rack to the nut plates provided through the center slots (four per crossrail ). The tap plates can be moved to accommodate various positions by sliding them inside the crossrail to the desired locations before mounting the acccssory rack. 2-60 If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails as far apart as possible. Tie the load to the moveable tie downs provided in the side rails. Also tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or side rails are damaged. NOTICE: Loading cargothat weighs more than 200 lbs. (91 kg) on theluggage carrier may damage your vehicle. When you carry largethings, never let them hang over therear or thesides of your vehicle. Load your cargoso that itrests on the slats anddoes not scratch ordamage thevehicle. Put the cargoagainst the side rails and fasten it securely to the luggage carrier. Put the main weight as far forward as you can. Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself. NOTICE: ~~~ -~- ~ Don’t hold a cigarette lighterin with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to back away from theheating element when it’s ready. That canmake it overload,damaging the lighter and theheating element. The front ashtray must be completely pulled out to the open position before the ashtray cover opens and smoking material can be deposited. To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving, check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened. 2-61 NOTICE: Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror (If Equipped) Don’t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtray. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire causing damage. To remove the front ashtray, lift the release tab as high as possible, then remove the tray. Four-door vehicles have smaller ashtrays inside the rear doors. Press PUSH to turn the ashtray around for use. V Sun Visors To block out glare. you can swing down the top and bottom visors. You can also swing the bottom visor from side to side. Your visors may have an extension that can be pulled out for additional glare protection and a strap for holding small items,such as maps. Visor Vanity Mirror Pull the sun visor down and lift the cover to expose the vanity mirror. 2-62 Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps. Accessory Power Outlets (If Equipped) Sunroof (If Equipped) If you have accessory power outlets,you can plug in auxiliary electrical equipment. The accessory power outlets are located below the cigarette lighter. Justpull down from the top of the doorand follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install. These circuits are protectedby a fuse and have maximum current levels. I NOTICE: When using the accessory power outlets, maximum electrical load must not exceed25 amps. Always turn off any electrical equipment when not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain your battery. Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof. Press and release the rear side of the button in the miniconsole to open the sunroof. You can press the forward side of the button to close the sunroof.Once the sunroof is closed, press the forward side of the button to open the sunroof to the vent position. The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you can pull forward to block sun rays. 2-63 Universal Transmitter (If Equipped) L !Mini Console Full-Size Console This transmitter allows you to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters.It will operate garrage doors and gates. or with the accessory package, other devices controlled by radio frequency such as home/office lighting systems and security systems. The transmitter will learn and transmit the frequencies of most current transmitters and is powered by your vehicle's battery and charging system. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation. Programming the Transmitter Do not use the transmitter with any garage dooropener that does not have the “stop and reverse’’ feature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982. Be sure that people crnd objects are clear of the garage door j ~ u are r progrmnming! Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the transmitter. Follow these stepsto program up to three channels: 1. If you have not previously programmed a universal channel. proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down the t w o outside buttons o n the universal transmitter until the red light begins IO !lash rapidly (approximately 20 seconds). Then release the buttons. This procedure initialiLes thc memory and erases any previous settings tor a l l three channels. 2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter against the bottom surface of the universal transmitter so that you can still see the red light. 3. Decide which one of the three channels you want to program. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter button and the desired button on the universal transmitter. Continue to hold both buttons through Step 4. 4. Hold down both buttons until you see the red light on the universal transmitter flash rapidly. The rapid flashing, which could take upto 90 seconds, indicates that the universal transmitter has been programmed. Release both buttons once the light starts toflash rapidly. you have trouble programming theuniversal transmitter, make sure that you have followed the directions exactly as described and that the battery in the hand-held transmitter is not dead. If you still cannot program it, rotate the hand-held transmitter end over end and try again. The universal transmittermay not work do not meet current with older garage door openers that Federal Consumer Safety Standards. If you cannot program the transmitter after repeatedattempLs, consult your GM dealer. 11 Be sure tokeep the originalhand-held transmitter in case you needto erase and reprogram the universal transmitter. 2-65 Operating the Transmitter Press and hold the appropriate button on the universal transmitter. The red light comes on while the signal is being transmitted. Note that the effective transmission range of the universal transmitter may differ from the hand-held transmitter and from one channel to another. Erasing Channels To erase all three programmed channels. hold down the two outside buttons until the red light begins to flash. Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be reprogrammed using the procedure for programming the transmitter explained earlier. Training a Garage Opener with a “Rolling Code” Feature If you programmed the universal transmitter, but the garage door will not open. and if your garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, your garage door may have a security feature that changes the ”code” of your garage door opener every time it is opened or closed. To determine if your garage door opener has this “rolling code” feature, press the appropriate button on the universal transmitter that was programmed. If the red light flashes rapidly for one to two seconds. then turns solid, your ,oarage door opener has this feature. 2-66 To program a garage door opener with the rolling code feature, do the following: 1. Program your hand-held transmitter to the universal transmitter by following the steps provided under “Programming the Transmitter“ earlierin this section. 2. Remove the cover panel from the garage dooropener receiver. It is located near the garage door opener motor. 3. Locate the training button on the garage door opener receiver. The exact location and color will vary among brands. 3. Press the training button on the garage door opener receiver for one to two seconds. 5. Return to your vehicle and press the programmed button on the universal transmitter until the red light flashes rapidly (about two seconds). 6. Release the button. then repress it to confirm it was programmed to the garage door opener receiver. You may now use either the universal transmitter or the hand-held transmitter to open your garage door. If you still have difficulty in programming and require assistance, please call 1-800-355-35 15. Accessories Accessories for the universal transmitter are available from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like additional information. please call 1-800-355-35 15. Instrument Panel I I 2-67 A. Air Vents H. Storage Compartment B. Instrument Cluster I. Audio System C. Electronic Transfer Case (If Equipped) J. Fog Lamps (If Equipped) D. Comfort Controls K. Lamp Controls E. Glove Box L. Rear Endgate Release F. Ashtray M. Brake Release G. Cigarette LightedPower Auxiliary Outlets (If Equipped) N. Rear Window Washermiper 2-68 0. Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped) Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You'll know how fast you're going, about how much fuel you've used, and many other things you'll need to know to drive safely and economically. 1 SERVICE ENGINE GATE 0 AJAR SHIFT UNLEAMD FUEL ONLY MPH P R N @ D 2 1 I 0 0 0 0 0 0 Standard Cluster 2-69 CHECK GAGES OIL 0 53% OptionaI'CIuster 2-70 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer showshow far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). Each tachometer has a different limit dependingon the powertrain in your vehicle. The tachometer hasthree areas: normal operating range, red warning range and red danger range. Your odometer is tamper resistant. It will show silver lines between the numbers if someone tries to turn it back. The normal operating range showsyour engine speed during normal driving conditions.For example, when the needle points to 2, it means the engineis running at 2,000 revolutions per minute (rpm). The tachometer needle will vary all the time that the engine is running. You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must be put on the driver’s doorto show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed. The shaded red warning range teIlsyou that your engine speed is reaching its upper limits. Don’t drive very long with the tachometer in the red warning range. If you have a manual transmission, shiftto a higher gear as soon as possible. If you have an automatic transmission, lift your foot off of the accelerator pedal. Trip Odometer The solid red danger range tellsyou that your engine speed is at its upper limits. Your should immediately shift to a higher gear, or lift your foot off of the accelerator pedal. The trip odometercan tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometerto zero. To set the trip odometerto zero, press the button near the readout . Tachometer (If Equipped) The tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions per minute (rpm). I NOTICE: Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red range, or engine damage will occur. 2-71 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them. Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle's functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages. some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they're workinz. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens. Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle's functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there's a problem with your vehicle. 2-72 When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, orwhen one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They're a big help. Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START. a tone will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver's safety belt is already buckled. The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds. then it will flash for about 55 seconds. If the driver's belt is already buckled, neither the tone nor the light will come on. Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag module, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system, see ‘*AirBag” in the Index. AIR BAG This light will come on when you start your engine, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready. The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t corne on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. Charging System IndicatorLight ~ ~ II.. The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition, but the engine is not running, as a check to show you it is working. It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with the charging system. It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drivebelt, or another electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery. If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. 2-73 Voltmeter Gage When your engine is not running, but the ignition is on (in the RUN position). this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in DC volts. (J VOLTS When the engine is running. the gage shows the condition of the charging system. Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range. 2-74 Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased. this condition should correctitself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power. YOLIcan only drive fora short time with the reading in either warning zone. If you must drive. turn off all unnecessary accessories. Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible. Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though,you need both parts working well. If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. 1 BRAKE This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn‘t come on then, have it fixed so it will be (a( )0) 20;1:, if I A CAUTION: I ~ 1 Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towedfor service. When the ignition is on. the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake.The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’trelease fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. if the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See ”Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.) 2-75 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ANTI - LOCK With the anti-lock brake system, this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds. That's normal. If the light stays on. or comes on when you're driving, your irehick needs service. If the regular brake system warning light isn't on. you still have brakes. but you don't have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on. you don't have anti-lock brakes and there's ;I problern with your regular brakes. See "B1-akc. Svstcm LVmling Light" earlier in this section. The anti-lock brakc. s>.4temwarning light should come on briet'ly n.hct1 ~ . o tu u r n the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn't co1nc3011 111cn. have it fixed so it will be ready t o w;m U)LI it' thew is a problem. 2-76 Engine Coolant TemperatureGage 260 This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is too hot! lt means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions. you should pull off the road. stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. In "Problems on the Road." this manual show you what to do. See "Engine Overheating" in the Index. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service Engine SoonLight) NOTICE: 1 SERVICE ENGINE SOON Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition andemission control systems. This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle. helping to produce a cleaner environment. ( I n Canada. OBD 11 is replaced by Enhanced Diqnohtics. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light co111eson t o indicate that there is a problem and service is rquired. X,l;df'unctions often will be indicated by the system bciore a n y problem is apparent. This may prevent mort' serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also t1csignt.d t o assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not beas good and yourengine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty. This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn't comeon, have it repaired. This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways: 0 0 Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service is required. Light On Steady -- An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required. 2-77 If the Light Is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle: 0 Reducing vehicle speed. 0 Avoiding hard accelerations. Avoiding steep uphill grades. If you are towing a trailer. reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. If the light stops trashing and remains on steady. see "If the Light Is On Steady" following. If the light continues to flash, when it is safe t o do so. stop the lyehiclc. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady. see "If the Light Is On Steady" following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps. and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service. If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following: Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle'? If so, reinstall the fuel cap. making sure to f u l l y install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel 2-78 cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water'? I f so. your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. Have you recently changed brands of fuel? I f so. be sure t o fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see "Fuel" i n the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up. stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on. If you experience one ormore of these conditions. change the fuel brand y o u use. It w i l l require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. tr none of the above steps have made the light turn off, have your ciealer or qualified service centercheck the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed. Engine Oil Pressure Gage The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running. 011 0- Canadian vehicles indicate pressurein kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range. A CAUTION: Don't keep drivingif the oil pressure is low. If so hot that it you do, your engine can become catches fire.You or others couldbe burned. Check youroil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. NOTICE: Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty. A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other ~roblemscausing low oil pressure. 2-79 -w Shift Light / f l s You have the shift light if you have a manual transmission. This light comes on very briefly as a bulb check whenyou start the engine. Shiftingwhen the indicator lightis on will help you get the best fuel economy. See "Shift Light" in the Index. 'd 8. Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light This light is on the instrument panel. It goes on whenever the DRL are on, the ignition is on,.the headlamp switch is off and the parking brake is released. 2-80 1 Check Gages Light The CHECK GAGES light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine. : ,.* . ,,.. ..3 CHECK GAGES i I 1 I . . -_. . If the light comes on and stayson while you are driving, check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones. ' 1; .. . I . , .;i ., -. "j .... Gate Ajar Light GATE AJAR Fuel Gage This light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine. If it stays on. your liftgate is ajar. Try closing the liftgate again. Never drive with the liftgate even partially open. When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have remaining. Here are four thingsthat some owners ask about. None of these show aproblem with your fuel gage: At the gas stsiion, the g a rump shuts off before the gage reads FULL (Fj. It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity tofill the tank. The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up. The gage doesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you turn off the ignition. 2-81 .@% NOTES 2-82 Section 3 Comfort Controls and AudioSystems In this section, you'll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle. 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-5 3 -6 3-6 3-6 3-6 Comfort Controls Climate Control System Air Conditioning Heating Ventilation System Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger (Option) Audio Systems Setting the Clock Setting the Clock for AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control AM-FM Stereo 3-8 3- 10 3- 13 3-17 3- 19 3- 19 3-20 3-2 1 3-2 1 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped) AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Equalizer (If Equipped) AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) Theft-Deterrent Feature Understanding Radio Reception Tips About Your Audio System Care of Your Cassette Tape Player Care of Your Compact Discs Fixed Mast Antenna Comfort Controls Temperature Knob With this system. you can control the heating. cooling and ventilation in your vehicle. The upper knob regulates the temperature of the air coming through the system. Turn the knob clockwise for w r n w air, Turn the knob co~~nterclockwise for cooler air. Climate Control System Mode Knob $8 hl OF 1 The lower knob allows you to choose the direction of a i r delivery. OFF: This setting turns the system off. Some outside air will still enter the vehicle whenever the vehicle is moving fot-w;lrd. XlAX A/C: This setting provides maximuM cooling with the least amount of work. MAX A/C recirculates much o f the air inside your vehicle s o it cools quickly. N C : This settins cools the air entering your vehicle and directs it 1111-oughthe instrument panel outlets. +e Fan Control The switch with the fan symbol changes the fan speed. To increase the fiu1 speed. move the switch upward toward HI. To decrease the fan speed, move the switch downward toward LO. 3-2 .)/J BI-LEVEL A/C: Air is delivered through the heater 11oor outlets a s well as the instrument panel outlets. +e /J VENT: This setting directs airflow through the instrument panel outlets. The air conditioning conlpressor is not working when VENT is selected. 0 + HEATER: ’ This setting directs warmed air through the heater floor outletsand windshield defroster outlets. w. ‘H BLEND: Airflow is divided equally between the heater floor outletand the windshield defroster outlets. DEFROST This setting directsmost air through the windshield defroster outletsand some through the heater outlets. Air Conditioning On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape. This reducesthe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed for the air conditionerto work its best. For quick cool-down on very hot days, use MAX A/C with the temperature knob turned counterclockwise. This setting should be used to keep odors and/or dust from entering the vehicle. For normal cooling on hot days, use A/C with the temperature knob turned counterclockwise. On cool but sunny days, use BI-LEVEL A/C to deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets. When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle‘s engine speed and power. This is normal because the system is designed to cycle the compressor on and off to keep the desired temperature. Heating The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it. On cold days, use HEATER with the temperature knob turned clockwise. BLEND is useful in cool weather when you have fog or ice on the windshield or side windows. If you use the optional engine coolant heater before starting your engine, yourheating system will produce warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index. 3-3 Ventilation System ror mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed. use VENT to direct outside air through your vehicle. Airtlow is through the instrument panel outlets. Your vehicle's ventilation system supplies outside air- to the inside of yo11r vehicle when it is moving. When the vehicle is not moving. you can get outside a i r to flow through by selecting any mode and any fan speed. You can move the outlets t o direct the flow o f air, or close the outlets altogether. When you close an outlet. it will increase the flow o f air coming out of m y outIets that are open. Ventilation Tips 0 0 0 You will find air outlets i n the center and on the sides o f your instrument panel. Defogging and Defrosting On cool, humid days. use BLEND to keep the windshield and side windows clear. Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extreme humid or cold conditions. Turn the temperature knob clockwise and move the fan control toward HI. Rear Window Defogger (Option) window of as much snow or ice as possible before using the rear window defogger. To turn on the rear window defogger. find the switch marked REAR DEFOG on your instrument panel below the headlamp switch. Press ON until the light in the switch comes on,then release it. it will only work if the ignition switch is turned to RUN. The rear window defogger will stay on for five to seven minutes, then turn off. If you need additional warming time, turn it on again. You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing OFF. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license. tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window. 1 NOTICE: Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. I f your vehicle has this option, the rear window will have lines that warm the glass. For best results. clear the 3-5 Audio Systems AM-FM Stereo Your Delco" audio system has been designed t o operate easily and give years of listening pleasure. You w i l l yet the most etl-joyment out of it if ~ O Lacq~laint I yo~~t-self with it first. Find out what yo11rDelco system can do and how to operate a l l its controls. to be sure you're 2 Oettins the most outof the advanced engineering that went into it. Setting the Clock for ANI-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control t Playing the Radio " Finding a Station AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM and FM. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations. SEEK: Press this button to go to the next higher station and stop. SCAN: Press this button to listen to each station for a few seconds. The radio will go to the next station, stop for a few seconds, then go to the next station. SCAN will appear on the display. Press SCAN again to stop scanning. PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you t-cturn to your favorite stations. You can set LIPto lit stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just: In addition to the four stations already set. up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just: 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) 3. Press two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time, within five seconds. Whenever you press the same two buttons, the station you set will return. 4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons. Setting the Tone BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease bass. TREBLE: Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy. you may want to decrease the treble. 4. Press S E T . ( S E T \vi11 appear on the display.j Adjusting the Speakers BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. 3-7 AM-FNI Stereo with Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped) Finding a Station AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM and FM. The display sl~owsyour selection. TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune i n radio stations. SEEK: Press this button t o go to the next higher station and stay there. SCAN: Press this button to listen to each station for a few seconds. The radio will go to the next station. stop f o r a few seconds. then go to the next station. SCAN w i l l appear on the display. Press SCAN again to stop scanning. Playing the Radio PWR-VOL: This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn i t counterclockwise to decrease volunw. I . Turn the radio on. RCL: Display the time with the ignition o f f by pressing this knob. When the radio is playing. press this knob t o recall the station frequency. 3. Tune i n the desired station. 1. Press SET, (SET will appear on the display.) 5 . PI-cssone o f the f’our pushbuttons. within five seconds. Whenever yo11press that numbered button. the station \:ou set will return. 6. Repeat the steps f’or each pushbutton. 3-8 In addition to the four stations already set, up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just: 1. Tune in the desired station. 2 . Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) 3. Press two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time. within five seconds. Whenever you press the same two buttons, the station you set will return. 4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons. Setting the Tone BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease bass. TREBLE: Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease treble. I f a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. Adjusting the Speakers BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the frontor rear speakers.The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. Once the tape is playing, use the PWR-VOL, BAL and FADE knobs just as you do for the radio. A lighted arrow will be displayed toshow tape play direction. FORWARD: Press the arrow button in the direction that the lighted arrow points to advance quickly to another part of the tape. Press STOP-EJECT lightly to stop forwarding and play the tape. REVERSE: Press the arrow button i n the opposite direction that the lighted arrow points to reverse quickly to another part of the tape. Press STOP-EJECT lightly to stop reversing and play the tape. PROG: Press this knob to go from one side of the tape to the other. STOP-EJECT Press this button to remove the tape or stop playing the tape in order to play the radio. If you leave a cassette tape in the player while listening to the radio, it may become warm. AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player'*:'# and Equalizer(If Equipped) AM-ST Press this button to tune an AM station that broadcasts in stereo. Your STEREO light will come on when you're receiving AM stereo. If you press AM-ST and there is no more noise, it means the station is weak. You'll hear the station better if you do not use AM-ST. Press the button again to turn off stereo. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM and FM. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations. SEEK: Press this button to go to the next higher station and stay there. Playing the Radio PWR-VOL: This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. SCAN: Press this button to listen to each station for a few seconds. The radio will go to the next station, stop for a few seconds, then go to the next station. SCAN will appear on the display. Press SCAN again to stop scanning. RCL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, pressthis knob to recall station frequency. ' 3-10 , I -., : i PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just: 1 . TLII-II the radio on. ' 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) 5. Press one of the four pushbuttons. within five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. In addition to the four stations already set. up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just: I. Tune in the desired station. Setting the Tone TONE ADJUSTMENT: Set the bass, midrange and treble by using the levers in the upper middle left corner to get the sound you want. The 60 and 250 levers adjust the bass, 1 K is midrange, and the levers 3.5K and 10K control the treble. We suggest you start with 1 K i n the midpoint position. Then move the other levers up until you get the amount of bass and treble you like. Adjusting the Speakers BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. 2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) 3. Press two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time. within five seconds. Whenever you press the same two buttons, the station you set will return. 4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons. 3-11 Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. Once the tape is playing, use the PWR-VOL. BAL and FADE knobs just as you do for the radio. A lighted arrow will be'displayed to show tape play direction. REVERSE: Press the arrow button i n the opposite direction that the lighted arrow points t o reverse quickly to another part of the tape. Press STOP-EJECT lightly to stop reversing and play the tape. FORWARD: Press the arrow button i n the direction that the lilhted arrow points t o advance quickly to another part o f the tape. Press STOP-EJECT lightly to stop forwarding and play the tape. SEARCH: Press this button to the recessed position. Press the lighted mow to skip to the next selection. Press the opposite direction an-ow that is n o t lighted to replay the current selection or skip to the previous selection. 3-12 CrO2:This button lets you set the system for the type of cassette being used. If you are using chrome or metal tapes. press the button in. PROG: Press this knob to go from one side o f the tape to the other. STOP-EJECT Press this button to remove the tape or stop playing the tape i n order to play the radio. If you leave a cassette tape i n the player while listening t o the radio. it may become warm. Your Delco system may be able to receive C-QljAM" stereo broadcasts. Many AM stations around the country use C-QUAM to produce stereo although some do not. C-QUAM is a registered trademark of ,Motorola, Inc. If vour Delco system can get C-QUAM signals, your STEREO light will come on when you are receiving stereo. AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary. to overcome noise at any particuiar speed. The volume level shouId always sound the same to you as you drive. I f you don't want to use SCV. turn the control all the way down. Each detent on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at a faster rate of speed. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM 1 and FM2. The display will show your selection. Playing the Radio PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is capable of rotating continuously. RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press this button to recall the station frequency. SCV Your system has a feature called Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCVj. With SCV, your audio system adjusts autornatically to make up for- road TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you're not using it. SEEK: Press the right m o w to tune to the next higher station and the left amow to tune to the next lower station and stay there. The sound w i l l mute while seeking. SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds m t i l SCAN appears o n the display. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will continue to scan and monxntarily stop at each station until you press the button again. The sound will mute while scanning. 3-13 PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM. six FM 1 and six FM2). Just: 1 . Turn the radio on. ? -. Press AM-FM t o select the band. 3. Tune i n the desired station. 4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting yo^^ prefer. 5 . Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons. The sound will mute. When it returns. release the button Whenever you press that numbered button. the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automatically selected for that button. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. 3-14 P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select either the AM. FM 1 or FM2 mode and then press P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to ;1 specific stored station. P.SCAN w i l l light up on the display while in this mode. I f one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are i n , the radio will skip the preset station and the radio display will show the channel number (P1 through P6) for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station. Setting the Tone Adjusting the Speakers BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it froln its BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise t o decrease bass. When the BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting will change to MAN. stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting will change to MAN. If a station is weak or noisy. you may want to decrease the treble. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them. AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the five preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the button, the selection will switch to one of the preset settings of CLASSIC, NEWS. ROCK. POP or JAZZ. The display will show which mode the receiver is in. To return to the manual mode, press and release this button until MAN appears on the display. This will return the tone adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a BASS or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting will change to MAN. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them. Playing a Compact Disc PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on. (Please note that you can also turn the system on when you insert a compact disc into the player with the ignition on.) Insert a disc partway into the slot. label side LIP.The player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc should play. CD and a CD symbol will also appear on the display. Anytime you are playing a CD. the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol. REV (43: Press and ho16 REV to return rapidly t o a favorite passage. YCXIwill hear the disc selection pIay at high speed while you press the REV button. This allows y o u to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired selection. Release REV to resum playing. FWD (6): Press and hold this butron to advance rapidly within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while YCNI press the FWD button. This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired selection. Release FWD to resume playing. AM-FM: While i n the CD mode. press this burton to stop playing the CD and play the radio, The CD symbol w i l l still display but the word CD will be replaced with either A M . FM I or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays i n the player and w i l l res~~rne playing at the point where it stopped.) KECALI,: Press this button to see what track is playing. Press it again within five seconds t o se.e how long the CD has been playing that track. Elapsed titne is displayed in minutes and tenths o f a second. The track number will also appear when ;Inew track begins to play. Press RECALL again to return to the time display. 3-16 CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button. To return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the display. ( I f the radio is turned off, the disc stays Theft-Deterrent Feature in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped.) The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen. EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the player and play the radio. When the same ora new disc is inserted, the disc wilI start playing on track one. If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in. The radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off, press this button to load a CD. If you leave a compact disc in the player while listening to the radio. it may become warm. THEFTLOCK” is designed to discourage theftof your radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed. When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytimebattery power is removed. If your battery loses power forany reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate. Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activatethe THEFTLOCK system. It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure. NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps, the radio automatically revertsto time and you must start the procedure over at Step4. 3-17 I . Write down any three or four-digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it i n a safe place separate from the vehicle. Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss 2. Turn the isnition to ACCESSORY or R U N . Enter your secret code as follows: pause n o more than I5 seconds between steps: 3. Turn the radio off. 1. LOC appears when the ignition is o n . 4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold thcm dow~l until --- shows on the display. Next yo11 will use the secret code number which you have written down. 2. Press M N and 000 cvill appear on the display. 5 . Press M N and 000 will appear o n the display. 4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree w i t h your code. 6. Press M N again to make the last two digits agree w i t h your code. 7. Press HR t o 111akethe first one or two digits agree with your code. 8. Press AM-FM after- you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you ha\;e written down. The display will show REP to Ict you know that you need t o repeat Steps 5 through 7 t o confirm your secret code. 3. Press M N again to lnake the last two digits agree with your code. 5 . Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code ~ O L I have written down The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is now operable and secure. If ~ O L I enter the wrong code eight times, INOP w i l l appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with the ignition o n before yo11 can try a p i n . When you try asain. you w i l l only have three chances to enter the correct code before lNOP appears. I f you lose or forger your code. contact your dealer. 3-18 Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature Enter your secret code asfollows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps: To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section. 1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. Understanding Radio Reception 2. Turn the radio off. FM Stereo 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until SEC shows on the display. FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go. 4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 5 . Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code. 6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code. 7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is no longer secured. If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered. When battery power is removed and laterapplied to a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on the display. AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it. Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing can adaptto higher volumes of sound. Sound that seemsnormal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it. 3-19 To help avoid hearingloss or damage: Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly. 1 NOTICE: Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delco radio or othersystems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly So, hefore adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and t w sure tocheck Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units. -- 3-20 -- Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes shouldbe stored in their cases away from contaminants, directsunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player. Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player. Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassettewith pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. I t is normal for the cassetteto eject while cleaning. Insert the cassette at least three times to ensurethorough cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaningcassette is available through your GM dealership. You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject and, it may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced. The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged. If the mast should ever become Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases andaway from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. Fixed Mast Antenna slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should replace it. Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the fender. 3-21 3-22 Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving. 4- 2 4-3 4-6 4-6 4-9 4-1 1 4- 12 4-13 4- 14 4-28 4-29 4-32 4-33 Defensive Driving Drunken Driving Control of a Vehicle Braking Steering Off-Road Recovery Passing Loss of Control Driving Guidelines Driving at Night Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads City Driving Freeway Driving 4-34 4-35 4-35 4-37 4-4 1 4-42 4-42 4-45 Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Winter Driving Recreational Vehicle Towing (Four-wheel Drive with the Manual Shift TransferCase Only) Recreational Vehicle Towing (Except Four-wheel Drive with the Manual Shift Transfer Case) Loading Your Vehicle Towing a Trailer 4- 1 Defensive Driving The best advice anyone cangive about driving is: Drive defensively. Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle LIP. (See"Safety Belts" in the Index.) Defensive driving really means "be ready for anything." On city streets, rural roads or freeways. it nleans "always expect the unexpected." Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable o f accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough follonring distance. It's the best defensive driving mmeuver. i n both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or t u r n suddenly. 4-2 Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributorto the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year. The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcoholand then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general informationon the problem. Alcohol affects four thingsthat anyone needs to drive a vehicle: The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC)of someone who is drinking depends upon four things: Drunken Driving 0 Judgment 0 Muscular Coordination 0 The drinker’s body weight 0 Vision 0 0 Attentiveness. The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking 0 The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol. Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol.In most cases, these deaths arethe result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, some 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol,so they never drive after drinking. For personsunder 2 1, it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychologicaland developmental reasons for these laws. The amount of alcohol consumed According to the American Medical Association, a 180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce ( 120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka. 4-3 Since alcohol is carried in body water. this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks. The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states. and throughout Canada. the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries. it's even lower. The BAC limit for all comnlercial drivers i n the United States is 0.04 percent. The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course. as we've seen. it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks. and how quickly the person drinks them. It's the amount of alcohol that counts. For example. if the same person drank three double martinis ( 3 ounces or 90 In1 of liquor each) within an hour. the person's BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinkingw i l l have a somewhat lower BAC level. There is a gender difference. too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men. 4-4 But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0. I O percent. the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater: at a level of 0.15 percent. the chance is 35 times greater! The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street’? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoidthe collision. There’s something else about drinkingand driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking -- driver or passenger-- is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking. I A CAUTION: I Drinking and then drivingis very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and judgment can be affected b y even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver who will not drink. -- -- 4-5 Control of a Vehicle Braking You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road. Braking action involvesperception time and reaction time. First, you have to decideto push on thebrake pedal. That’s perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time. Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 314 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,so keeping enough space between your vehicleand others is important. And, of course, actualstopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied. Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. 4-6 Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life. If your engine ever stops while you‘re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push. - . Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes(ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid. When you start your engine and begin to drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noisewhile this test is going on. This is normal. If there’s a problem with the ANTI - LOCK anti-lock brake system, this warning light will stay on. See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” in the Index. 4-7 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure lister than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. Here's how anti-lock works. Let's say the road is wet. You're driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out i n front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here's what happens with ABS. A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. I f one of the wheels is about to stop rolling. the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at the rear wheels. 4-8 You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard. As you brake. your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the timeyou need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you‘ you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even thoughyou have anti-lock brakes. Using Anti-Lock Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal. On vehicleswith four-wheel drive, your anti-lock brakes work at all times -- whether you are in two-wheel drive or four-wheeldrive. Braking in Emergencies With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking. Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. Steering Tips Driving on Curves It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here’s why: Experienced driver or beginner, eachof us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. I f you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you‘ll understand this. The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control. 4-9 Suppose you‘re steering througha sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. What should YOLI do if this ever happens‘?Ease up on the accelerator pedal. steer the vehicle the way you want it to go. and slow down. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course. the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. I f y o u need t o reduce your speed as you approach it curve. do it befhre you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead. Try t o adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the CLII-ut.klaintain ;I reasonable, steady speed. Wait to acwlcrate llntil > . o u are out of the curve. and then accclcrate gcntlv i n t o the straightaway. 3- 1 0 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere. or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t: there isn’t room. That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around the problem. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. (See ”Braking in Emergencies” earlier i n this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem. to the left or right depending on the space available. Off-Road Recovery You may find sometime that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile you're driving. I OFF - ROA An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, you can turn it a tull 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. Bur you hrt\*eto act fast, steer quickly,and just a h quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the ob-jcct. The fact t h a t wch clncrgcncy situations are always possible i h ;I good reason t o practice defensive driving at all times and NYN satety belts properly. v/ edge of paved surface If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. 4-11 Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits for just the right moment. accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead. then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation. an error i n judgment. or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: "Drive ahead." Look down the road. to the sides and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about malung a successful pass. wait for a better time. Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection. delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it's all right to pass (providing the road ahead isclexj. Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line. even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic. 4-12 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you're awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision. especially if you're following a larger vehicle. Also, you won't have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.Keep back a reasonable distance. When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don't get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass. you will have a "running start" that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass. you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity. If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn't trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot. Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its frontin your inside mirror, activate your rightlane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.) Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle. Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn. If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right. Loss of Control Let’s review what driving experts say aboutwhat happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and accelerationj don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. In any emergency, don‘t give up. Keep tryingto steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger. Skidding In a skid, a drivercan lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle‘s three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid,too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. 4-13 If your vehicle starts to slide. ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. I f you start steering quickly enough. your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow. ice. gravel or other material is on the road. For safety. you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on a surface with reduced traction. try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including enginebraking by shifting to a lower t oear). A n y sudden changes could causethe tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water. ice or packed snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface“-- and slow down when you have any doubt. Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. 4-14 Driving Guidelines This multipurpose passenger vehicle is defined asa utility vehicle in Consumer Information Regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) of the United States Department of Transportation. Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nmower track to make them capable of perfolming in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics givethem a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of the higher 2 oround clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems.They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two-wheel-drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. Off-Road Driving withYour Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Before You Go Off-Roading There are sutfre things to do before you go out. For This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel drive. example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done. Check to make sure all underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure you read all the information about your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving? If you don’t know, you should check with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission. Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index. If your vehicle doesn‘t have four-wheel drive,you shouldn‘t drive off-road unless you‘reon a level, solid surface. Off-road driving can begreat fun. But it does have some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. “Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren‘t marked. Curves aren’t banked. There areno road signs. Surfaces can be slippery. rough, uphill or downhill. In short. you’ve gone right back to nature. Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll find many driving tips and suggestions. Thesewill help make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable. Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle. The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle. Put heavier itemsas far forward as you can. Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around. 4- 15 A CAUTION: 0 0 0 Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a suddenstop. You or your passengers could be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks. Unsecured cargo on theload floor canbe tossed about when driving over rough terrain. You or your passengers canbe struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly. Heavy loads on theroof raise the vehicle's center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over. You can be seriously or fatally in.jured if the vehicle rollsover. Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, noton the roof. Keep cargoin the cargo areaas far forward and low as possible. You'll find other important information in this manual. See "Vehicle Loading." "Luggage Carrier" and "Tires" in the Index. 4-16 Environmental Concerns Off-road driving can provide whoIesome and satisfying recreation. However. it also raises environmental concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges every off-roader to follow these basic rules for protectins the environment: Always use established trails, roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off-road recreational drivihg; obey all posted regulations. 0 Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment -- shrubs. flowers. trees, grasses -- or disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning, breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground). 0 Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving. Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted). camp stoves and lanterns. 0 Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other cotnbustible materials that could catch fire f1-0~11the heat of the vehicle's exhaust system. Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going to a remote area.Know the terrain and plan your route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain.Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads. It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle. If something happensto one of them, the other can help quickly. Does your vehicle have a winch? If so. be sure to read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to use it properly. Getting Familiar with Off-RoadDriving It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safeand close to home before you go into the wilderness. Off-road driving does require some new and different driving skills. Here’s what we mean. Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes. for example,need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands, feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce. Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving. Oneof the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed.Here are some things to keep in mind. At higher speeds: 0 you approach things fasterand you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles. e you have less time to react. 0 you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles. a you’ll need more distance for braking, especially since you’re on an unpaved surface. IA CAUTION: When you’re driving off-road, bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. This could cause you to lose control and crash. So, whether you’re driving on or off the road, youand your passengers should wear safety belts. Scanning the Terrain Off-road driving can take you over mLmy different kinds of terrain. You need to be fatniliar with the terrain and its many different features. Here are some things to consider. Surface Cmditiom. Off-roading can take you over hard-packed dirt, gravel. rocks. grass. sand, mud, snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration and brakinz of your vehicle i n different ways. Depending upon the kind of surfxe you are on. you may experience slipping. sliding. wheel spinning. delayed acceieration, poor traction and longer braking distances. Sru-fnce 0hstcrcle.v. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. A rock. log hole. rut or bump CUI startle you if you're not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes. snow or even the rise and f a l l of the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider: Is the path ahead clear'? 0 Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead'? Does the travel take you uphill or downhill'? (There's more discussion of these sub-jectslater.) Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quicklv'? 4-18 When you drive over obstacles orrough terrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughsor other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you're not prepared. When you drive over bumps. rocks, or other obstacles, your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens. even with one or two wheels, you can't control the vehicle as well or at all. Because you will be on an unpaved surface. it's especially important to avoid sudden acceleration. sudden turns or sudden braking. In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road signs. posted speed limits or signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn't. Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road. And this is certainty true for off-road driving. At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills, your reflexes. perceptions and judgment can be affected by even z1 small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. See "Drunken Driving" in the index. Driving on Off-Road Hills Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a hill. Driving safelyon hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do. There are somehills that simply can’t be driven, no matter how well built the vehicle. IA ~ ~ CAUTION: Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive down them, you can’t control your speed. If you drive across them, you will roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness, don’t drive the hill. Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth. constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs. Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill. 0 Is there a constant incline, ordoes the hill get sharply steeper in places? 0 Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface causetire slipping? 0 Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won’t have to make turning maneuvers? 0 Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path (boulders. trees, logs or ruts)? 0 What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment. a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to find out. 0 Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion. 4-19 Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you need to take some special steps. 0 0 0 Use a low gear and get a firm grip or1 the steering wheel. Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. Don't use more power than you need. because you don't want your wheels to start spinning or sliding. Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If the path twists and turns, you might want to find another route. IA CAUTION: Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. When driving uphills, always try to go straight up. 4-20 0 Ease LIPon your speed as you approach the top of the hill. 0 Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills. 0 Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you.1-e there. 0 Use your headlamps even during the day. They make you more 1:isible to oncoming traffic. A CAUTION: Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can cause a n accident. There could be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, o r even another vehicle. You could be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the topof a hill, slow down and stay alert. @ What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill? A: If this happens, there are some things you should do. and there are some thingsyou must not do. First, here’s what you should do: 0 Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake. 0 If your engine is still running, shift the transmission to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R). 0 As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover. Here are some thingsyou must not do if you stall, or are about to stall, when going up a hill. 0 If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to restart it. With the brake pedal depressed and the parking brake still applied, shiftthe transmission to PARK (P) (or, shift toNEUTRAL (N) if your vehicle has amanual transmission) and restart the engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowlyback down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE (R). Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the engine and regain forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control. Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back straight down. 0 Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to causeyou to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up the hill, you must back straight down the hill. 4-21 Suppose, after stalling,I try to back down the hill and decide I just can’t doit. What should I do? A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in PARK ( P ) (or the manual transmission in FIRST ( I ) ) and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL ( N ) when you leave the vehicle. Leave i t i n some gear-. 4-22 ~ A CAUTION: I If you have a manual transfer case shift lever, shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL(Nj can cause your vehicle to rolleven if the transmission is in PARK (P) (or, if you have the manual transmission, even if you’re in gear). Thisis because the NEUTRAL(N) position on the transfer case overrides the transmission. If you are going to leave your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift the transmission to PARK (P) (or, put your manual transmission inFIRST (I)). But do not shift thetransfer case to the NEUTRAL (N) position. Leave the transfer case in the 2HI,4HI or 4LO position. Driving Downhill When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to consider a number of things: 0 How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control? 0 What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough‘?Slippery‘? Hard-pac ked dirt ‘? Gravel? 0 Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts’? Logs? Boulders’? 0 What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks? If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down, anduse a low gear. This way. engine drag can help your brakes and they won‘t have t o do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping y ) u r \rehick under control at all times. I1 A CAUTION: I Heavy braking when going aown a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control. &= A: Are there some things I should not do when driving down a hill? Yes! These are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident. 0 When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across. You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down. 0 Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). or with the clutch pedal depressed in a manual shift. This is called “free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade. 4-23 Q: A: 0 Am I likely to stall when going downhill? from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover. It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes. Apply the parking brake. Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL ( N ) with the nlanual transmission) and,while still brakin,,0 restart the engine. Shift back to a low gear. release the parking brake, and drive straight down. I f the engine won’t start, get out and get help. Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some things to consider: 0 A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or down a hill. the length of the wheel base (the distance from the front wheels t o the rear wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when you drive across an incline, the much more narrow track width (the distance between the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle 0 Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill. Loose gravel. muddy spots, or even wet 2 orass can cause your tires to slip sideways. downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways. it can hit something that will trip it (a rock. a rut, etc.) and roIl over. 0 Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more. For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully whether t o try to drive across 31incline. Just because the trail goes ;lcross the incline doesn’t mean you have to drive it. The last vehcle to try it might have rolled over. A CAUTION: Driving across an incline that’s too steep will make your vehicle roll over.You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline, don’tdrive across it. Find another route instead. A 4-24 e: A: What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill. What should I do? If you feel your vehicle starting to slideside.ways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a much better way to prevent this is toget out and “walk the course” so you know what the surface is like before you drive it. Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you’ll be right in its path. If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over. A CAUTION: Getting out on the downhill (low) sideof a vehicle stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high)side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path. . . 4-25 Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice When you drive in mud. snow or sand. your wheels won't get good traction. You can't accelerate as quickly, turning is more difficult. and you'll need longer braking distances. It's best to use a low gear when you're in mud -- the deeper the mud. the lower the gear. In really deep mud. the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don't b *et stuck. When you drive on sand, you'll sense a change in wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering. accelerating and braking. You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand. This will improve traction. Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction. On these surfaces, it's very easy to lose control. On wet ice, for example. the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can came you t o slide out of control. 4-26 I A CAUTION: Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be dangerous. Underwater springs. currents under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your vehicle could fall through theice and you and your passengers could drown. Driveyour vehicle on safe surfaces only. Driving in Water Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems. But heavy rain can mean tlash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution. Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it. If it's deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or exhaust pipe. don't try it -- you probably won't get through. Also. water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts. If the water isn’t too deep, then drivethrough it slowly. At fast speeds, water splasheson your ignition system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occurif you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long asyour tailpipe is under water, you’llnever be able to start your engine. When you go through water, remember that when your brakes get wet, itmay take you longer to stop. b I A CAUTION: Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweepyour vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it’s only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from underyour tires, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’tdrive through rushing water. See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more information on driving throwh water. After Off-Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody, chassis or under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard. After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned and checked. These substancescan cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure. steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage. Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information. Driving at Night a Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the olare fromheadlamps behind you. Since you can't see as well, you may need to sIow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. 3 0 0 k- ---I Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. a In remote areas, watch for animals. 0 If you're tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest. Night Vision N o one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice a s much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by alcohol or drugs. with night vision problems. or by htigue. Here are some tips on night driving. 0 Drive defensively. Don't drinkand drive 4-28 What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example. if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you're driving, don't wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible. You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driverwho doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps. Keep your windshield andall the glass on your vehicle clean -- inside and out. Glareat night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contractrepeatedly. Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving: that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Justas yourheadlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim,so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren‘t even aware of it. Driving in Rainand on Wet Roads U Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good ason dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. 4-29 The heavier the rain,the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic sipals. pavement markings. the edge of the road and even people walking. It's wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. 4-30 Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can't. try to slow down before you hit them. I A CAUTION: Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won't work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose controlof the vehicle. After driving througha large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally. Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. Driving Through Deep Standing Water I NOTICE: If you drive tooquickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drivethrough water thatis slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can’t avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly. Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections fromtrees. telephone poles or othervehicles. and raindrops “dimple“ the water’s surface. there could be hydroplaning. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn‘t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. Some Other Rainy Weather Tips 0 Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. 0 Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.) 4-31 City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You'll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic sipals. Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: a Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. a Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You'll save time and energy. (See the next part. "Freeway Driving.") a Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green. and just before you start to move. check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. 4-32 Freeway Driving The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clearview of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance overyour shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on thefreeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it‘s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikesor superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own specialrules. Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” spot. 4-33 Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit. The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. Is your vehicle ready for a long trip?If you keep it serviced and maintained, it's ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you'll find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealerships all across North America. They'll be ready and willing to help if you need it. Here are some things you can check before a trip: 0 The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are. Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? 0 Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels? Lurrzps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? Before Leaving on a Long Trip Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure'? Make sure you're ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you're not fresh -- such as after a day's work -- don't plan t o make too many miles that first part of the journcv. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive i n . 0 4-34 Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windows clean inside and outside? Weather For-ecvrsts: What's the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system? Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps'! Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually sucha condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Callit highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a secund, and you could crash and be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: L 0 Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. 0 Keep y o u r e y e s moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently. Driving on steep hills ormountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain. 0 I f you Sct d w p y . pull off the road into a rest, service or parking xe;L and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety. treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer andmore enjoyable. (See “Off-Road Driving’’ in the Index for information about driving off-road.) 4-35 Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires. cooling system and transmission. These parts can work hard on mountain roads. Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steepor long hill. A CAUTION: If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down tolet your engine assist yourbrakes ona steep downhill slope. IA CAUTION: Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill. Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift downto a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission. and you can climb the hill better. Stay in your own lane when driving o n two-lane roads i n hills o r mountains. Don‘t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There couldbe something in your lane. like a. stalled car or an accident. You may see hishway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones. a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. 4-36 Winter Driving Include an ice scraper,a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include asmall bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Besure you properly securethese items in your vehicle. Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those placeswhere your tires meet the road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful. Here are some tips for winter driving: Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. 0 You may want to put winter emergency suppliesin your vehicle. 4-37 Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow -- drive with caution. Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast. the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. ‘‘1 :-................ .................. . . . . ... .. .. . ., .. ._. ._ ._ .. ._. _ .. .. _. _. _ . _, ..I _ . . _ . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . , , , . . , , , , Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping soonerthan you would on dry pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index. Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. A What’s the worst time for this’?“Wet ice.“ Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there. 4-38 Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve oran overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. I f you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. If You’re Caught in a Blizzard Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow. Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanketaround you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insuIators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags , floor mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: 0 Turn on your hazard flashers. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. 4-39 A CAUTION: Snow cantrap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This can cause deadlyCO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You can’t see ito r smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the baseof your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t collect there. Open a window justa little on the sideof the vehicle that’s away from the wind. Thiswill help keep CO out. 4-40 Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make i t 90 a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle. and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while. Then. shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm. you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes. Recreational Vehicle Towing (Four-wheel Drive With Manual Shift TransferCase Only) 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Place an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in FIRST ( 1). 3. Firmly attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle. Do not tow the vehicle by the rear bumper bar. Refer to the hitch manufacturer’s instructions. 4. Place the manual shift transfer case shift lever in NEUTRAL (N). IA CAUTION: Shifting the transfer case into NEUTRAL (N) can cause your vehicle to rolleven if the transmission is in PARK (P), for anautomatic transmission, or if your vehicleis in gear, for a manual transmission. You or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brakeis firmly set before you shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL (N). 5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attachedto the tow vehicle. 6. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it one notch forward of the LOCK position. This places the key in the OFF position, which unlocks the steering column while preventing battery drain. Unlocking the steering column will allow for proper movement of the front wheelshires duringtowing. 4-41 Recreational Vehicle Towing (Except Four-wheel Drive With Manual Shift Transfer Case) Loading Your Vehicle Vehicles with two-wheel drive or the optional electronic shift transfer case require special modifications before they can be towed in this manner. Please contact your dealer for the towing information that is appropriate for your particular vehicle. Vehicles with all-wheel drive (AWD) can not be towed in this manner. The Certificationflire label is found on the driver’s door edge, above the door latch. The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle. all occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer. 4-42 The Certificatioflire label alsotells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on both sides of the centerline. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR for eitherthe front or rearaxle. If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. Similar appearing vehiclesmay have different GVWRs and payloads. Please note yourvehicle’s Certificationmire label or consult your dealer for additional details. Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the rightway. NOTICE: Your warranty does not coverparts or components thatfail because of overloading. If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going. I A CAUTION: ~ ~ ~ _ _ ~~ _ ~ _ Do not load your vehicie any heavier than the GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear GAWR. If you do, partson your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. .. . . 4-43 A CAUTION: ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. 0 Put things in the cargo areaof your vehicle. Try tospreadtheweight evenly. 0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicleso that some of them are above the topsof the seats. 0 Don't leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. 0 Don't leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to. There's also important loading information lor off-road driving in this manual. See "Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving" in the Index. 4-44 Payload The payload capacity is shown on the Certificationflire label. This is the maximum load capacity that your vehicle can carry. Be sure to include the weight of the occupants as part of your load. If you added any accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the factory, remember to subtract the weight of these things from the payload. Your dealer can help you with this. Add-on Equipment When you carry removable items, you may need to put a limit o n how many people you carry inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before ~ O Lbuy I and install the new equipment. NOTICE: Your warranty doesn't cover partsor components that fail because of overloading. L I NOTICE: Towing a Trailer I A CAUTION: I ~ I i If you don’t use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the traileris too heavy, the brakes may not work well or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your GM dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. -- ~ Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this part, andsee your GM dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Every vehicle is ready for $time trailer towing. If yours was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful. safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer. 4-45 If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you have an automatic transmission, you can use DRIVE (D) (or. as you need to, a lower gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the lifeof your transmission. If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH ( 5 ) gear. Just drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear). If you do, here aresome important points: a There are many different laws, includingspeed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police. a Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls. a Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. a Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don‘t drive over50 mph (80 k m h ) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. Three important considerations have to do with weight: 0 the weight of the trailer, the weight of the trailer tongue and the weight on your vehicle’s tires. Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safelybe? It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed. altitude, road grades. outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle. The following chart shows how much your trailer can weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options. 4-46 Vehicle 2-Wheel Drive, Auto. Trans. 2-Wheel Drive, Manual Trans. 4-Wheel Drive & All-Wheel Drive, Auto. Trans. 4-Wheel Drive & All-Wheel Drive, Manual Trans. Axle Ratio Trailer Wt. 3.OS 4,500 lbs. (2 04 1 kg) 5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg) 3.42 3.424,500 lbs. (2 04 1 kg) 3.08 3.42 3.73 3.42 4,000 lbs. (1 8 14 kg) 5,000 lbs. (2 268 kg) 5,000’1bs.(2 268 kg) 4,000 lbs. (1 8 14kg) Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment.The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers and cargoin the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight. You can ask your dealerfor our trailering informationor advice, oryou can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet. In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L 1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. 4-47 Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle‘s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires.You’ll find these numbers on the CertificationRire label on the driver’s door edge, above the door latch, or see‘.Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. A B If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). Hitches It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow: If you‘ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. Thisequipment is very important for propervehicle loading and good handling when you’re driving. After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren‘t, you may be able t o get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer. 4-48 - 0 Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? Trailer Brakes If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt andwater can, too. loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be adequate. Be sure toread and follow the instructionsfor the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. Safety Chains You should always attach chains betweenyour vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated fromthe hitch. instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground. If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 Ibs. (450 kg) Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system only i f The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure. The trailer’s brake system will use less than 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes. If everything checks out this far,then make the brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this. if you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel brake tubing. Driving witha Trailer If you have a rear-most window open and you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide (CO)could come into yourvehicle. You can’t see or smellCO. It can cause unconsciousness or death. (See “Engine Exhaust”in the Index.) To maximize your safety when towinga trailer: Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks, and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip. 0 Keep the rear-most windows closed. If exhaust does come into yourvehicle through a window in the rear or another opening, drive with your front, main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed. This will bring fresh, outside air into your vehicle. Do not use MAX A/C because it only recirculatesthe air inside your vehicle. (See b‘ Comfort Controls” in the Index.) 4-50 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road. you‘ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself. Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform (and attachments). safety chains. electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. I f the trailer has electric brakes. start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time. During your trip. check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure. and that the lamps and a n y trailer brakes are still working. Following Distance Making Turns Stay at least twiceas far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns. I NOTICE: Passing You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you‘re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance. I’urn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher (includedin the optional trailering package). The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you‘re about to turn, change lanes or stop. 4-51 When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It's important to check occasionally to be surethe trailer bulbs are still working. Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear byfilw you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don't shift down. you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well. On a long uphill grade. shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission overheating. if you have an automatic transmission. you should use DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in DRIVE ( D ) when towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your transmission. Or. if you have a manual transmission. it's better not to use FIFTH ( 5j gear. just drive i n FOURTH (4) gear (or. as you need to. a lower gear). 4-52 When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades. consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this. let the engine run while parked (preferably on level ground) w i t h the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the rnanual transmission out of gear and the parking brake applied) for afew minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get the overheat warning, see "Engine Overheating" in the Index. Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle. with a trailer attached. on ;Ihill. I f something goes wrong, your ris could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. 7 .? A CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with the i I parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. If you have leftthe engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re onfairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N),your vehicle will be free to roll, evenif your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfercase isin a drive gear not in NEUTRAL (N). -- When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 . Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down whiie you: Start your engine: Shift into a gear: and Release the parking brake. 3,. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. 4-54 Maintenance When TrailerTowing Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt. cooling system and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this manual. and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it‘s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. Trailer Wiring Harness The light duty trailerwiring is a six-wire harness assembly. The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring is an eight-wire harness assembly. The harnesses are stored under the vehicle, along the passenger-side frame crossmember on two-door vehicles or on the driver’s side corner framecrossmember on four-door vehicles. The heavy-duty trailer wiring has a 30-amp feed wire with an inline fuse located by the junction block. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index. Both harnesses have no connector and should be wired by a qualified electrical technician.The technician can use the following color code chart when connecting the wiring harness to your trailer. Dark Blue: Use for electric trailer brakes or auxiliary wiring. 0 0 Light Green: Back-up lamps (eight-wire harness only). Brown: Taillamps and parking lamps. 0 Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal. 0 Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal. 0 White (Heavy Gage): Ground wire. 0 White (Light Gage): Auxiliary stoplamp. Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tape or strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave it loose enough so the wiring doesn‘t bend or break, but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Storethe harness in its original place. Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged. Red: Use for battery charging; it connects to the starter solenoid (eight-wire harnessonly). 4-55 .bNOTES 4-56 Section 5 Problems on the Road Here you'll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road. 5 -2 5-2 5-3 5 -7 5-12 Hazard Warning Flashers Other Warning Devices Jump Starting Towing Your Vehicle Engine Overheating 5-22 5 -22 5-23 5-35 5-36 Engine Fan Noise If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire Compact Spare Tire (If Equipped) If You're Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow 5-1 Hazard Warning Flashers Press the button on top of the steering column all the way down to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in. To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first click and release. Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. 5-2 When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won’t work. Other WarningDevices If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. Jump Starting If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cablesto start your vehicle. But please use the following steps to do it safely. I A CAUTION: I ~ 1 ~ NOTICE: I ~ Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it. This could damage your vehicle, even if you have a manual transmission. And if you have an automatic transmission, it won’t start thatway. ~ ~ ~ Batteries can hurtyou. They can be dangerous because: 0 They contain acid that can burn you. They contain gas that can explodeor ignite. 0 They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurtyou. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. I NOTICE: If the other systemisn’t a 12-volt system witha negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. 5-3 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cabIes can reach. but be sure the vehicles aren't touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don't want. You wouldn't be able to start your vehicle. and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems. You could be injured if the vehicles roll. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (Pj or a manual transmission i n NEUTRAL (N).If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with a manual transfer case shift lever. be sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). IA CAUTION: An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric Fan. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter. or accessory power outlets, if you have this option. Turn off all lamps that aren't needed as well as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it could save your radio! I NOTICE: If you leave your radioon, it could be badly damaged. The repair wouldn'tbe covered by your warranty. IA CAUTION: If your vehicle has airconditioning, the auxiliary electric fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing andtools away from any underhood electricfan. 4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery. IA CAUTION: Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t need to add water to theDelco Freedom@ battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Don’t get it on ~ o u I.f you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. 5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll get ashort that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. of the vehicle with the dead battery. 5-5 7. Don‘tletthe other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) tennitla1 of the good battery. 9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as b w o d there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. 8. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good battery’s negative (-) terminal. Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative cable doesn’t $0 to the dead battery. It goes to a hewy unpainted metal part o n the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery. 5-6 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 1 1 . Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won‘t start after a few tries make sure all connections are good. If it still won’t start, it probably needs service. 1 A CAUTION: Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engines are running. I 12. Remove the cables in reverse orderto prevent electrical shorting. Take carethat they don’t touch each otheror any other metal. Towing Your Vehicle Try to have a GM dealer or a professional towing service tow your vehicle. See“Roadside Assistance” in the index. If your vehicle has been changed since it was factory-new by adding things like fog lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these instructions may not be correct. -0 A Before you do anything, turn on the hazard warning flashers. When you call, tell the towing service: e Whether your vehicle has rear-wheel drive, four-wheel drive or all-wheel drive. The make, model and year of your vehicle. A. Heavy Metal Engine Part Whether you can move the shift lever for the transmission and shift the transfer case, if you have one. B. Good Battery If there was an accident, what was damaged. C. Dead Battery When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator know that this manual contains thesetowing instructions. The operator may want to see them. 5-7 A CAUTION: A CAUTION: To help avoid injury toyou or others: Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds. Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck. Always use separate safety chains on each side when towing a vehicle. Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead. 5-8 A vehicle can fall from a car carrier if it isn’t adequately secured. This can cause collision, a serious personal injury andvehicle damage. The vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or steel cables before it is transported. Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps, canvas webbing, etc.) that can be cut by sharp edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use ,J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and suspension components. When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key turned to the OFF position. The steeringwheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle's steering column lock for this. Thetransmission should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the transfer case, if you have one, should be in 2HI. The parking brake should be released. 1 - If your vehicie has a floor mounted shifter and no electrical power, the electrical solenoid lock must be overridden to shift from PARK (P) to NEUTRAL (N). Follow these steps: 1. Push the base of the shift lever boot forward with your thumb. 2. Lift the boot and find the white solenoid lever. 3. Move the solenoid lever toward the driver's side to unlock it. 4. While holding the solenoid lever in the unlock position, press the shift lever button and shift into NEUTRAL (N). 5 . Release the solenoid lever and snap the boot back into place. Don't have your vehicletowed on the drive wheels unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the drive wheels, be sure to follow the speed and distance restrictions later in this section oryour transmission will be damaged. I f these limitations must be exceeded, then the drive wheels have to be supported on a dolly. 5-9 NOTICE: Do not tow with sling-type equipment o r fascia/fog lamp damage will occur. Use wheel-lift or car carrier equipment. Additional ramping may be required for car-carrier equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps. Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage a vehicle. Damage can occurfrom vehicle to ground or vehicle towheel-lift equipment. To help avoid damage, install a towing dolly and raise thevehicle until adequate clearance is obtained between the ground and/or wheel-lift equipment. Do not attach winch cables o r J-hooks to suspension components when usingcar-carrier equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted inthe T-hook slots. 5-10 Tow Limits -- 35 mph (56 k d ) , 30 miles@3O krn) . . '*Vehicles with all- wheel-drive or four-wheel-drive and the electrbni'ctransfer case DptibMmlasritse'a iowing dully undwthefront wheels &hen towing from the reay: ~, Do not tow with sling-type equipment or rea bumper valance damagewill occur. Use whee or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping may be required for car-carrier equipment. safety chains andwheel straps. Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from vehicle to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift equipment. Unless you have all-wheel drive,to help avoid damage, installa towing dolly and raise the vehicle until adequate clearanceis obtained between the ground and/or wheel-lift equi Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to suspension components whenusing car-carrier equipment. Aiways use T-hooks inserted in . . ' ., +y2zL. .r I> .I Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s instrument panel. If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine A CAUTION: Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant beforeyou open the hood. If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engine is cool. NOTICE: If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, yourvehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. 5-12 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: Climb a long hill on a hot day. 0 Stop after high-speed driving. If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle rightaway. 1. Turn off your air conditioner. If there’s still no sign of steam, push the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast asnormal idle speed. Bring the engine speed back to normal idle speed after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the warning, turn o f t h e engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary. You may decide not to liftthe hood but to get service help right away. Idle for long periods in traffic. Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index. If you get the overheatwarning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: 3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@) or DRIVE (D) for automatic transmissions. 5-13 When you decide it's safe to lift the hood. here's what you'll see: hi A CAUTION: If your vehicle hasair conditioning, the auxiliary electric fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothingand tools away from any underhood electric fan. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don't do anything else until it cools down. A. Coolant Recovery Tank B. Radiator Pressure Cap C. Engine Fan 5-14 A CAUTION: Heater and radiatorhoses, and otherengine parts, canbe very hot. Don’ttouch them. If you do, you can’be burned. Don’t run the engineif there isa leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drive thevehicle. The coolant level shouldbe at the ADD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak inthe radiator h heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere elselr ww l 44l How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank I f you haven‘t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn‘t at the ADD mark, add a SO/SO mixture of clenrz w t e r (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL” (silicate-free) antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See ”Engine Coolant” i n the Index for more information.) A CAUTION: Adding only plain water to yourcooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolantmix. With plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could get too hot but >‘ouwouldn’t get the overheat warning. k‘our engine could catch fire andyou or others could he hurned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean water and DKX-CWOL” coolant. 5-16 NOTICE: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mix. 4 I A CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine. When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the ADD mark, start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it. 5-17 A CAUTION: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, andif you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap tocool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. -- 5-18 -- How to Add Coolant to the Radiator 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. 1 . You can remove the pressure cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don't press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss. wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 5-19 1 3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL" coolant mixture. up t o the base of the filler neck. 5-20 3. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the ,4DD mark. 5 . Put t h e cap back o n the coolant recovery tank. but leave the pressure cap off. A 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine fan. 7 . By this time, the coolant level inside the filler neck may be lower. If the Ievel is lower. add more of the 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this. proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck. 5-21 Engine Fan Noise If a Tire Goes Flat This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan.When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins fasterto provide more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions, the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures. the fan speed increases when the clutch engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The fa11 will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages. It's unusual for a tire to "blow out" while you're driving. especially if you maintain your tires properly. I f air goes o u t of a tire, it's much Inore likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have ;I"blowout." here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages. 5-22 If a front tire fails. the flat tire w i l l create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position. and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout. particularly on a curve. acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you'd use in a skid. I n any rear blowout. remove your foot from the xcelerator pedal. Get the \,chicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be \.cry bunlpy and noisy. but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible. Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire andwheel damage by driving slowly to a levelplace. Turn on your hazard warning flashers. A CAUTION: Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured. Find a level placeto change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brakefirmly. 2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in PARK (P) or shift a manual transmission to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R). CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) 3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with a manual transfercase shift lever, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL (N). 4. l b r n off the engine. 5. Put the wheel blocks at the frontand rear of the tire farthestaway from the one being changed. That would bethe tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end. -- 5-23 h The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire. Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The jacking equipment you'll need is stored along the driver's rear wall. In some cases. you may have to remove the spare tire in order to reach the jack. Your vehicle is also equipped with work gloves and a plastic ground mat to assist in the changing of a flat tire. 5-24 To remove your jack cover, pull up on the latch at the end of the cover, near the endgate and the latch on the top of the cover. Remove the wheel blocks, jack and wheel wrench. The following instructions explain how to remove the spare tire, depending on where it is mounted on your vehicle. [ NOTICE: Never remove or restow a tire frodto a stowage position under the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by a jack. Always tighten the tire fully against the undersideof the vehicle when restowing. To remove the underbody-mounted spare, insert the chisel endof the wheel wrench, on an angle, into the hole in the rear bumper. Be sure the chisel end of the wheel wrench connects into the hoist shaft. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. When the tire has been completely lowered, tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle. I NOTICE: To help avoid vehicle damage, do not drive the vehicle before the cable is restored. If you have an inside-mounted spare tire, the tire must be removed in order to have access to the jack storage. To remove an inside-mounted spare tire, reach into your tire's cover and unscrew the wing nut at the center of the wheel. Remove it and the retainer. Unhook the tire from the mounting bracket and remove the cover. To remove a rear-mounted spare tire, firstmake sure that the carrier arm is fully latched to the endgate. Then remove the spare tire cover. I The locking wheel nut can be removed by snapping the rubber weather cover off the face of the lock case. Insert the key and pull the lock case straight off. It is not necessary to turn the key. Put the spare tire near the flat tire. The tools you'll be using include the jack ( A ) and wheel wrench (B). Your vehicle may also have an optional hub cap removal tool. The optional hub cap removal tool is stowed with Position the hub cap removal tool in the notch and pull straight away from the wheel to avoid potential damage to the hub cap and wheel surface. Remove the hub cap. If you have an aluminum orplastic molded hub cap, pry it off with the chisel end of your wheel wrench. Some of the molded plastic hub caps have imitation wheel nuts molded into them. The wheel wrench won’t fit these imitation nuts, so don’t try to remove them with the socket end of the wheel wrench. If you have individual wheel nutcaps that cover each nut, they must be removed in order to get to the wheel nuts. Use the socket end of the wheel wrench to remove the wheel nut caps. Your wheel nut caps may attach your hub cap to the wheel. Remove these wheel nut caps beforeyou take off the hub cap. 5-27 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 3. Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the tlat tire. i L E & A. Front Frame Hole B. Rear Frame Hole (2-Door) or Spring Hanger Hole (4- Door) I /d CAUTION: Getting under a vehicle when isitjacked upis dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injuredor killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. I NOTICE: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle to fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure tofit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. a 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit. 5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. 6. Remove' any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel. I A CAUTION: ~~ Never use oil or grease on studsor nuts. If you do, the nuts might comeloose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident. 7. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface. A CAUTION: Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; butbe sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rustor dirt off. 5-30 8. Put the nuts on by hand. Make sure the cone-shaped end is toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub. If a nut can't be turned by hand. use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon as possible. . . I n A 10. Use the wrench to tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown. 9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. 5-31 A CAUTION: Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead toan accident. Be sure to use the correctwheel nuts. If you have to replace them, besure toget new GNI original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhereas soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to95 lb-ft (130 Nom). Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools A CAUTION: Storing a jack,a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. Ina sudden stopor collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the properplace. NOTICE: NOTICE: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should always be stored under thevehicle with the hoist. However, storing it thatway for anextended period could damage thewheel. To avoid this, have the wheel repaired as soon as possible. Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted spare. 1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle, with the valve stem pointed down andto the rear. A. Retainer 2. Pull the retainer through the wheel. B. Valve Stem 3. Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench, on an angle, (Pointed Down) C. Spare or Flat Tire D. E. E G. Spring Wheel Wrench Lower Raise H. Hoist Arm through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise until the tire is raised against the underside of the vehicle. You will hear two “clicks“ whenthe tire is secure, but pull on the tire to make sure. Y ; BJ 5-33 Follow this diagram for the inside-mounted spare. Follow this diagram for the rear-mounted spare. C7 C D i - i, A. Spare or Flat Tire A. Wheel Carrier B. Retainer (Two-Wheel Drive) B. Spare Tire C . Nut C. Wheel Nut and Locking Nut Cylinder D. Retainer (Four-wheel Drive) Reinstall the locking wheel n u t using the wheel wrench. Then push the lock case onto the lug nut until it stops. The key does n o t have to be inserted into the lock. Push the lock case to be sure it is secured. The special lug nut and lock case is not intended to be used on any road wheel. only on the spare wheel carrier. Tighten the nuts on the wheel carrier to 22 to 32 Ib-ft (30 to 40 N-m). E. Wheel Carrier E Hook Return the jack,wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the proper location in your vehicle’s rear area. Secure the items and replace the jack cover. II A CAUTION: Make sure the tire andcarrier are secure. Driving with the tire or carrier unlatched could injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle. I Compact Spare Tire(If Equipped) Although the compact spare tirewas fully inflated when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). - A. Retainer E Wheel Blocks B. Rubber Band (Some Modelsj G . Hub Cap Removal Tool (‘SomeModels) C . Work Gloves H. Wheel Wrench D. Mat I. Jack E. Jack Storage Cover J. JackingInstructions After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distancesup to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again. 5-35 NOTICE: When the compact spare is installed, don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other partsof your vehicle. Don‘t use your compact spare on other vehicles And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They won‘t fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together. NOTICE: Tire chains won’t tit your compact spare. Using them can damage yourvehicle and can damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains onyour compact spare. 5-36 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow What you don‘t want to do when your vehicle is stuck is to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking“ can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution. A CAUTION: If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, andyou or others could be injured. And, the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fireor other damage. When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 k m h ) as shown on the speedometer. I NOTICE: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth, you can destroy your transmission. I Using the Recovery Hooks P For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in the Index. Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear (or with a manual transmission, between FIRST ( 1) or SECOND ( 2 ) and REVERSE(R)), spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them. If you do need to be towed out, see ”Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks. The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuck off-road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving. 5-37 IA CAUTION: The recovery hooks, when used, are undera lot of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could break off and you or others couldbe injured from the chainor cable snapping back. NOTICE: Never use the recovery hooks to tow thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty. 5-38 I Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section beginswith service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricantlevels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care. 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-9 6- 13 6- 14 6-18 6- 19 6-20 6-2 1 6-23 6-26 6-26 6-26 6-27 Fuel Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank Checking Things Under the Hood Engine Oil Air Cleaner Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission Fluid Hydraulic Clutch Rear Axle Four-wheel Drive and All-Wheel Drive Engine Coolant Radiator Pressure Cap Thermostat Power Steering Fluid Windshield Washer Fluid 6-28 6-32 6-3 3 6-3 8 6-40 6-49 6-49 6-52 6-54 6-57 6-58 6-58 6-58 6-62 6-63 6-64 Brakes Battery Bulb Replacement Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Care of Safety Belts Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle Appearance Care Materials Chart Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Service Parts IdentificationLabel Electrical System Replacement Bulbs Capacities and Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerants Service Your GM dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You‘ll get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. We hope you’ll wantto keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: n Delco Doing Your Own Service Work 6-2 Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work. see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See ”Maintenance Record?’in the Index. I A CAUTION: You can be injured and yourvehicle could be damaged if you try to do servicework on a vehicle without knowing enough aboutit. Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task. Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and other fasteners. “English” and “metric” fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. Adding Equipmentto the Outsideof Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your GM dealer before adding equipment tothe outside of your vehicle. Fuel Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications ASTM D48 14 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association ( AAMA) for better vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system protection compared to other g a ~ )i nes. l Be S C I I -the ~ p o s ~ c octane l is at least 87. If the octane is less than 87. y o u m a , gct a heavy knocking noise when YOLI driirc. If’ it‘\ hac1 crlough. it can damage your engine. If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher andyou still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noisewhen you’re accelerating or drivingup a hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octanefuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem. If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label), it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards,your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. 6-3 Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions containan octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask your service station operatorwhether or not his fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for service. I NOTICE: To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives thatwill help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system, allowing your emission control system to function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol. and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier. If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada. the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never not recommended in the use leaded gasoline or any other fuei previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. To check on fuel availability, askan auto club. or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving. You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VTN). General Motors International Product Center 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa. Ontario L 1H 8P7 6-4 Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty. Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right. The fuel capis behind a hinged door on the driver’s sideof your vehicle. A CAUTION: Gasoline vapor ishighly flammable. It burns violently, and that cancause very bad injuries. Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away fromgasoline. A CAUTION: If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. Gasoline can sprayout on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open thefuel filler cap slowly and wait for any“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all theway. 6-5 Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See "Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle" in the Index. When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See "Malfunction Indicator Lamp" in the Index. Checking Things Under the Hood To open the hood, first pull the handle inside the vehicle on the lower driver's side of the instrument panel. 1 NOTICE: If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, itmay not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged. See "Malfunction Indicator Lamp" in the Index. 6-6 Then go t o the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood release. I A CAUTION: Things that burn can geton hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood. You may have a lamp that comes on when you lift the hood. 6-7 When you lift the hood. you'll see these items: * C B -- ."*f . .. A. Battery B. Coolant Recovery Tank C. Engine Oil Dipstick 6-8 D. Transmission Dipstick E. Engine Oil Fill F. Power Steering Reservoir G. Brake Master Cylinder H. Air Cleaner I. Windshield Washer Fluid Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps areon properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from theslot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer. Checking Engine Oil Pull out the dipstick and clean it with apaper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level. Then just pull the hood down firmly to close. It will latch when dropped from 10 to12 inches (25 to 30 cm) without pressing on the hood. Engine Oil It’s a good idea to check your engineoil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. The oil dipstick is a yellow ring. Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. 6-9 When to Add Oil What Kind of Oil to Use If the oil is at or below the ADD line. then you'll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see "Capacitiesand Specifications" in the Index. Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the "Starburst" symbol. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleunl Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol. NOTICE: Don't add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area thatshows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged. Be sure to fill i t enough to put the level somewhere i n the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you're through. If you change your own oil. be sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol o n the front of the oil container. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines. You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle. as shown in the following chart: 6-10 SAL VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AN0 COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THL'EXPECTEDTEMPERATURE RANGE. HOT WEATHER LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 1OW-30 if it's going to be 0" F (- 18 " C )or above. Thesenumbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50. I NOTICE: Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines "Starburst" symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. If you are in an area where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29OC), consider using either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold startingand better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. '---.l COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 6-11 Engine Oil Additives Don't add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added. When to Change Engine Oil If any one of these is true for you. use the short tripkity . maintenance schedule: a Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles ( 8 to 16 km). This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing. a Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic). a You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off-road frequently. 0 You frequently tow a trailer or use a currier on top of your vehicle. a The vehicle is used for delivery service. police, taxi or other commercial application. 6-12 Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter every 3.000 miles ( 5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever occllrs first. If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every 7,500 miles ( 12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever occurs first. Drivinga vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower. Remote Oil Filter (Four-wheel Drive) The access door for the remote oil filter is in the steering linkage shield assembly located under the radiator support. Twist the screw to unlock or lock the door. Make sure if you open the door. it is securely closed I finished. when ~ O L are What to Do with Used Oil Air Cleaner Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don't let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containingused engine oil. (See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.) Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil. be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal.Don't ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash. pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodiesof water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or alocal recycling center for help. cr To remove the air cleaner, remove the wing nuts that hold the cover on. Remove the cover and lift out the air filter. Insert a new air filter, then replace the air cleaner cover. Tighten the wing nuts to hold the cover in place. - .. 6-13 A CAUTION: Operating the engine with the air cleaner off can cause you or others tobe burned. The air cleaner not only cleans theair, it stops flameif the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaneroff. Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (53 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. In hilly or mountainous terrain. When doing frequent trailer towing. NOTICE: Uses such as found in taxi. police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. If the air cleaneris off, a backfire can causea damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. into your engine, whichwill damage it. Always have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving. 6-14 How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult,you may choose to have this done atyour GM dealership Service Department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. NOTICE: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be ' sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. ~ Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving: 0 When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). At high speed for quite a while. In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather. 0 While pulling a trailer. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (83OC to 93°C). Checking Transmission Fluid Hot Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (IOOC). If it's colder than 50°F (IOOC ), drive the vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes. Then follow the hot check procedures. 6-15 Checking Transmission Fluid Cold Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours ormore with the engine off and is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are50°F ( 10°C) or more. If it's colder than 50°F ( I O O C ) , you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low during a cold check. you mrrst perform a hot check before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level. Checking the Fluid Hot or Cold 0 Park your \.tthicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. 0 With the parking brake applied. place the shift lever i n PARK ( P ) . 1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 2. Push i t back in all the way, wait three seconds and then p ~ d li t back out again. 6-16 How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Add fluid only after checking thetransmission fluid HOT. (A COLD check is used only as a reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. it doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill. 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for a cold checkor in the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check. 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. I ~ NOTICE: ~~ ~ We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON@-111,because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission. Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-111 is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.” When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. 6-17 Manual Transmission Fluid When to Check A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed. However, the fluid in your manual transmission doesn't require changing. Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case. Then. follow these steps: How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult. you rnay choose to have this done at your GM dealership Service Department. If you do it yourself. be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading. I NOTICE: i Too much or too little fluid can damage your 1 transmission. Too much can mean that someof the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting afire. Be sure to get an accurate readingif you check your transmission fluid. 6-18 1. Remove the filler plug. 2. Check that the lubricant level is LIPto the bottom of the filler plug hole. 3. If the fluid level is good. install the p l ~ ~mgd be sure it is f ~ l l l yseated. If the fluid level is low. add more fluid as described in the next steps. How to Add Fluid When to Check and What to Use Here’s how to add fluid. Referto the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. I. Remove the filler plug. 2. Add fluid at the filler plughole. Add only enough fluid tobring the fluid levelup to the bottom of the filler plughole. 3. Install the filler plug.Be sure the plug is fully seated. Hydraulic Clutch The hydraulic clutch systemin your vehicle is self-adjusting. A slight amount of play (1/4 inch to 112 inch or 6 mm to 12 mm) in the pedal is normal. It isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your clutch fluid. Adding fluid won’t correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule, Owner Checks and Services, to determine how oftenyou should check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinderreservoir and for the proper fluid. See “Owner Checksand Services” and “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index. 6-19 How to Check How to Check Lubricant The proper fluid should be added if the level does not reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it's in place in the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap. Rear Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See "Scheduled Maintenance Services" in the Index. If the level is below the bottom of the fiIler plug hole, you'll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See "Recommended Fluids and Lubricants" in the Index. 6-20 Four-wheel Drive and All-Wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant Most lubricant checks in this section also applyto four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two additional systems that need lubrication. Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections’’ in the Index. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 6-21 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you‘ll need to add some lubricant. If the differential is at operating temperature (warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. If the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1/2 inch (: 12 mm) below the filler plug hole. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See ”Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 6-22 Engine Coolant The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL J engine coolant. This cooIant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km) whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant. The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. A 50/50 mixture of water and the DEX-COOL@coolant for your vehicle will: Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). Give boiling protection up to 265 “ F ( 129°C). Protect against rust and corrosion. Help keep the proper engine temperature. Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. NOTICE: When adding coolant,it is important thatyou use only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant. If coolant other than DEX-COOL@ is added to I the system, premature engine, heater coreor radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX-COOL@ is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. -- What to Use Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL@ coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this mixture. you don’t need to add anything else. 6-23 A CAUTION: Adding only plain waterto yourcooling system can be dangerous. Plainwater, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mix will. Your vehicle’scoolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mix. With plain water or thewrong mix, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire andyou or others could be burned.Use a 5060 mix of clean water and DEX-COOL@coolant. NOTICE: If you usean impropercoolant mix, your engine could overheat andbe badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. Too much waterin the mix can freeze and crack theengine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer checkyour cooling system. I NOTICE: If you use the propercoolant, you don’t have to add extra inhibitorsor additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. 6-24 Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and'radiator arehot can allow steam and scalding liquidsto blow out and burnyou badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost never have toadd coolant at the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator arehot. -- -- I .dd DEX-COOL@coolant mixture at the vnlrnmk, but be careful not to sp"' ; + Radiator Pressure Cap Thermostat a Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system.The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature. Power Steering Fluid ... NOTICE: Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and must be tightly installedto prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrowson the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck. 6-26 ... ., - --. When to Check Power Steering Fluid Windshield Washer Fluid It is not necessary to regularly checkpower steering fluid unlessyou suspect thereis a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. What to Use How To Check Power Steering Fluid When the engine compartmentis cool, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean,then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstickwith a clean rag.Replace the cap and completely tightenit. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level onthe dipstick. The level shouldbe between the ADD and FULL marks. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the proper range. What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use, see “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Always use the proper fluid. Failureto use the proper tluid can cause leaksand damage hoses and seals. When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructionsbefore use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. Adding Washer Fluid 1 . i L . . ‘r Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. 7 6-27 NOTICE: 0 0 0 0 When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer's instructions for adding water. Don't mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid, Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system.Also, water doesn't clean as well as washer fluid. Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it's very cold. This allows for expansionif freezing occurs, which could damage the tankif it is completely full. Don't use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. Brakes Brake Fluid c Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. There are only two reasonswhy the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason isthat fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid. See“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index. Checking Brake Fluid I So, it isn’t a good idea to “topoff’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. IA &- CAUTION: If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engineis hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap. Just look at the windows on the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid levels shouldbe above MIN. If they aren’t, have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak. After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the levels areabove MIN and below the top of each window. 6-29 What to Add When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 1 1 (GM Part No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. NOTICE: @ Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir. 1A CAUTION: With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could causea crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. 6-30 1 Using the wrong fluid can badly damage just a few brake system parts. For example, drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone putin the wrong kind of fluid. If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index. Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This couldbe a sign of brake trouble. Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes adjust for wear. If your brake pedal goes down farther thannormal. your rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times. Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. 6-32 When you replace parts of your braking system -- for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don‘t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. Battery Every new vehicle has a Delco Freedom@battery. You never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. Vehicle Storage Bulb Replacement If you’re not going todnve your vehicle for 25 days or more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery fiom running down. Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps are off and the engine isn’t running. See “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index. I A CAUTION: Halogen Bulbs , Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that canexplode. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index for tipson working around a battery without getting hurt. I /d CAUTION: Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and bulb. You or can burst if you drop or scratch the others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructionson the bulbpackage. Contact your dealerto learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent Feature” in the Index. 6-33 Headlamps 2. Pull the headlamp out and remove the retainer. Sealed Beam Lamps 1. Remove the screws from the headlamp retainer. I 3. Unplug and remove the headlamp. 4. Plug in the new headlamp and put it i n place. 5 . Put the retainer on the headlamp and install and tighten the screws. 6-34 4. Unplug the electrical connector. Composite Headlamps 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the black protective caps from the removal pins at the top of the radiator support. Use a hex socket to unscrew the pins. c I , . .*::g> 1.21 3. Pull the headlamp lens assembly out. (Some vehicles may have side-by-side bulbs.) , ' ..-g .. ' 5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. 6. Put the new bulb into the headlamp lens assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight. 7. Plug in the electrical connector. 8. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the vehicle. Install and tighten the screws. Front Turn Signal Lamps 2. Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it out. If you have fog lamps. the fog lamp bracket must be removed before you can replace the front turn signal lamps. 3. Holding the base of the bulb, pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks. 5. Put the socket back into the turn signal lamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks into place. Front Sidemarker Lamps L 1 1. Remove the lens retaining screws. -. ? Remove the sidemarker lens from the radiator grille. U 3. Turn the bulb and socket one-quarter turn counterclockwise. 3. Remove the bulb and socket from the lens. 5 . Install the new bulb and socket to the sidemarker lens. I . Reach under the bumper and behind the turn s i p a l lamp assembly. 6. Rotate the bulb and socket one-quarter of a turn clockwise. 7 . Install the sidemarker lens to the radiator grille. 8. Insert the tabs into the locators. 9. Install and tighten the screws. 6-36 6. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until Taillamps it clicks. 1. Open the endgate. 2. Remove the two screws from the lamp assembly. 7. Put the socket into the lamp assembly and turn the socket clockwise until it locks into place. 8. Install the lamp assembly and screws. 9. Close the endgate. Underhood Lamp 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the underhood lamp assembly. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Disconnect the ground wire. 4. Remove the lamp assembly from the hood. 3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle. 5 . Install the new bulb. 4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it. Push the tab in while you turn the socket counterclockwise. 6. Replace the assembly. Install and tighten the screws. 5. Holding the base of the bulb, pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 7 . Connect the ground wire. 8. Connect the electrical connectorto the lamp assembly. Front Reading Lamps 4. Press the new bulb into place. 1. Use a coin or small screwdriverto unscrew the center of the overhead console lamp lens while pressing in on the lamp assembly. 5 . Slide the side tabs of the lens under the side of the vanity assembly frame. 2 . Remove the lamp assembly from the console. 7. Snap the lens into the frame. 3. Remove the bulb assembly from the lamp assembly. Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 4. Pull the bulb straight out of the base. 5 . Put a new bulb into the bulb base. 6 . Install the bulb assembly into the lamp assembly. 7. Place the lamp assembly into the console, turning it to latch it in place. 8. Install the lens. Vanity Mirror Lamps 1. Insert the blade of a small screwdriver into the center slot at the bottom of the lens. 2. Gently pry the screwdriver down in order to lift out the lens. 3. Pry out the bulb. 6-38 6. Rotate the lens downward. See "Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts" in the Index for the proper type of replacement blade. I NOTICE: Use care when removingor installing a blade assembly. Accidental bumping can causethe arm to fall back and strike the windshield. 1. To remove the old wiper blades. lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position. 1 3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The insert has two notches at one end that are locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly.At the notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly. A / ‘0 A. Blade Assembly D. Blade Pivot B. Arm Assembly E. Hook Slot C . Locking Tab E Arm Hook 2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from the wiper arm hook. 4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D), notched end last, into the end with two blade claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the opposite end(B). The plastic caps ( C ) will be forced off as the insert is fully inserted. 5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom claws. Make sure that all other claws areproperly locked on both sides of the insert slots. 6-39 Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement See “Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement’‘ in this section for instructions on how to change the backglass wiper blade. The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position like the windshield wiper blade, so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle. Tires Your new ve.hicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service. see your warranty booklet for details. C B -~ A. Claw in IVotch B. Correct Installation C. Incorrect Installation 6 . Put the hlxit. a~st.mblypivot in the wiper arm hook. Pull up u n t i l fhc pi\.ot locking tab locks in the h o o k slot. 7. Caref’uIIv Io\t.cr the wiper arm and blade assembly o n t o the \vindshiclci. Inflation -- Tire Pressure ~ ~~~ ~~~ Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. 0 Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See “Loading YourVehicle” in the Index. 0 Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires arecold. 0 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or brokenby a sudden impact such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure. 0 Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged. replace them. -- The CertificationRire label,which is on the driver’s door edge, above the door latch, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). NOTICE: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get the following: 0 Too much flexing 0 Too much heat Tire overloading Bad wear 0 Bad handling Bad fuel economy. NOTICE: (Continued) 6-41 I NOTICE: (Continued) If your tires have too muchair (overinflation), you can get the following: Unusual wear Badhandling Roughride Needless damage from road hazards. When to Check Check your tires once a month or more. Also. check the tire pressure of the spare tire. If you have a compact spare tire. it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You can't tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. 6-42 I Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 6.000 to 8.000 miles (10 000 t o 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear. rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See "When It's Time for New Tires" and "Wheel Replacement'' later in this section for more information. The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See "Scheduled Maintenance Services" in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals. iI LWA r I Rust or dirton a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change awheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirtoff. (See “Changing a Flat Tire”in the Index.) If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, don’t include it in your tire rotation. After the tires have been rotated, adjustthe front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the CertificationRire label. Makecertain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. 6-43 When It's Time for New Tires One way to tell when it's time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch ( 1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. 0 You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber. 0 The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. 6-44 0 The tire has a bump, bulge or split. The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can't be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need. look at the CertificatiodTire label. The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire's sidewall. When you get new tires. t oet ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed t o give proper endurance. handling, speed rating, traction. ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an "MS" (for mud and snow). If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial)as your original tires. I A CAUTION: Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types (radial andbias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handle properly, andyou could have a crash. Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure touse the same size and type tires on all wheels. It’s all rightto drive with your compact spare (if you have one). It was developed for use on your vehicle. Uniform Tire Quality Grading The following information relates tothe system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some lirnited-production tires. While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. Treadwear The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half ( 1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantlyfrom the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. 6-45 Traction -- A, B, C The traction sades, from highest to lowesr. are A. B. and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction per-fornmance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead)traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. Temperature -- A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest). B, and C. representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life. and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separatelyo r in combination. can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other. the alipment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced. Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent. cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel. wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air. replace it (except some aluminum wheels. which can sometimes be repaired). See your GM dealer if any of these conditions exist. Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. 6-46 Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle. I A CAUTION: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tireslose air and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement. NOTICE: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tireor tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information. Used ’Replacement Wheels I A CAUTION: Putting aused wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause an accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel. 6-47 Tire Chains NOTICE: (Continued) NOTICE: If your vehicle has P235/75R15,P235/70R15 or 31x10.50Rl5LT/C size tires, don’tuse tire chains. They candamage your vehicle because there’s not enoughclearance. Use another type of traction device onlyif its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tiresize combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels. NOTICE: (Continued) , If you do finda traction device that will fit, install them on the reartires. If you have other size tires, use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class “S”’type chainsthat arethe proper size for yourtires. Install themon the drive axle tires (four-wheel-drive vehicles canuse chains on both axles) and tighten them as tightly as possible with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions.. If you can .hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle. 6-48 I Appearance Care Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumesin a closed space. When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’swarnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. Never use these to clean your vehicle: Gasoline Benzene Naphtha CarbonTetrachloride Acetone PaintThinner 0 Turpentine 0 LacquerThinner 0 Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous -- some more than others -- and they can all damageyour vehicle. too. Don’t use any of these unless thismanual says you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach ReducingAgents Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner oftento get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or leatherwith a clean, damp cloth. Your GM dealer has two cleaners, a solvent-type spot lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They will clean normal spots and stainsvery weil. Do not use them on vinyl or leather. Here are some cleaningtips: 1. Always read the instructions on me cleaner label. 2. Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set. 3. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A softbrush may be used if stains are stubborn. 4. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use them, don’t saturatethe stained area. 5. If a ring forms after spot cleaning, cleanthe entire area immediately orit will set. Using Foam-Type Cleaneron Fabric Using Solvent-Qpe Cleaner on Fabric 1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loosedirt. First. see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all. Some spots and stains will clean off better with just water and mild soap. 2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. 3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the directions on the container label. 4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don‘t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly. 5 . As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the suds. 6. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge. 7. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel or cloth. 8. Dry it imnlediately with a blow dryer. 9. Wipe with a clean cloth. 6-50 If you need to use a solvent: 1. Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with a clean. dull knife or scraper. 2 . Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths (preferably cheesecloth).Cleaning should start at the outside of the stain, “feathering” toward the center. 3. Keep changing to a clean section of the cloth. 4. When you clean it stain from fabric. immediately dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a cleaning ring. Fabric Protection Non-Greasy Stains that has been Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet treated with Scotchgard" Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It protects fabricsby repelling oil and water, which are the carriersof most stains. Even with this protection, you still need to cleanyour upholstery and carpet often to keepit looking new. Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can be removed as follows: Further information on cleaningis available by calling 1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6 167). Special Cleaning Problems Greasy or Oily Stains Stains causedby grease, oil,butter, margarine, shoe polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils,wax crayon, tar and asphalt can be removed as follows: 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier. Shoe polish,wax crayon, tarand asphalt will stain if left on a vehicle's seat fabric. Theyshould be removed as will soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner dissolve them and may cause them to spread. 1. Carefully scrapeoff excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water. 2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions described earlier. 3. If an odor lingers aftercleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. 4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner. Combination Stains Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stainscan be removed as follows: 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry. 3. If a stain remains, cleanit with solvent-type cleaner. 6-51 Cleaning Vinyl Cleaning the Top of the InstrumentPanel Use warm water and a clean cloth. Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it more than once. 0 Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don't get them 08quickly. Use a clean cloth and a vinylkather cleaner. See your dealer for this product. Cleaning Leather use a sort cloth with lukewarm water ana a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. 0 For stubborn stains. use a leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product. 0 iVLJ\.tl\. use oils. varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive clerlners. furniture polish or shoe polish on leather. Soiled or staincd leather should be cleaned ir1lmedi;ttcly. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish. i t CUI 11x111the leather. 6-52 Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry. I A CAUTION: Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mild soapand lukewarm water. Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid. Cleaning the Outsideof the Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer. or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax. sap o r other rnaterial may be on the blade or windshicld. Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami@ Powder(non-scratching glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water. Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water. Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn. Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.) 6-53 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle Finish Care The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability. Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use liquid hand, dish or carwashing (mild detergent) soaps. Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, orthey could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle. Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.“ 6-54 Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. I NOTICE: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoatklearcoat paint finishmay dull the finish or leave swirl marks. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts. ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings. chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.. can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Exterior painted surfaces are subjectto aging, weather and chemical faIIout that can taketheir toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually needed. However, you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary. Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or caustic soapto clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts. Cleaning Aluminum Wheels (If Equipped) Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied. The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicon carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage the surfaceof these wheels. Cleaning Tires To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner. I NOTICE: When applyinga tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the bodyor wheels of the vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the paint finish. Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced torestore corrosion protection. Finish Damage Chemical Paint Spotting Any stone chips, fractures ordeep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense. Some weather and atmospheric conditionscan create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaceson your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop. Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed. accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame. floorpan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you. 6-56 Although no defect in the paint job causes this. GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase. whichever occurs first. Appearance Care Materials Chart 2377964 16 oz. (0.473 L) Cleaning Wax Protectsremoves finish and fine scratches 12377966 16 oz. (0.473 L) Finish Enhancer cleans Spot paint and gives high luster See your General Motors Parts Department for these products. **Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl. See ‘‘Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 6-57 Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) 0 your VIN, the model designation, paint information and I GM I I SAMPLE4UXVM072675 ENGINE/1997 T CODE MODEL YEAR \ IE‘ I ASSEMBLY PLANT This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front cornerof the instrument panel. on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine. specifications and replacement parts. Service Parts Identification Label You‘ll find this label on the inside of the glove box. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is: 6-58 a list of all production options and special equipment. I Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. Electrical System Add-on Electrical Equipment Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle. see ”Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle’’ in the Index. Headlamps The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remainoff. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked rightaway. Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected aby circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,be sure to get it fixed. If you ever have a problem on the road and don't have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can. Instrument Panel Fuse Block The fuse block is at the driver's end of the instrument panel. Power Windows and Other PowerOptions Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away. Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the chance of fires causedby electrical problems. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. Remove the cover by turning the fastener counterclockwise. Extra fuses and the fuse extractor are provided in the cover. To reinstall the fuse panel cover, push in and turn the fastener clockwise. r n r l WOO d co FuseKircuit Breaker Usage ACCY A w 1 2 3 FuseKircuit Breaker Usage A Power Door Locks, Power Seat, Power Seat Lumbar, Remote Keyless Entry B Power Windows, Sunroof Module/Motor 6-60 4 Stoplamps, Hazard Lamps, Chime, Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Relay, Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Dome Lamps. Cargo Lamps, Visor Vanity Mirror, Cigarette Lighter, Inside Rearview Mirror Lamp, Overhead Console Lamps, Glove Box Lamp, Horns, Horn Relay, IP Courtesy Lamps, Power Outside Rearview Mirror, Liftglass Release Motor, Illuminated Entry Module Parking Lamps, License Plate Lamps. Electric Shift Transfer Case Module, Underhood Lamp, Rear Wiper. Fog Lamp Relay, Door Switch Lamp, Ashtray Lamp, Headlamp Switch A/C Compressor Relay, Cluster Chime Module, DRL Relay Coil, Four-Wheel-Drive Indicator Lamp, DRL Module, Rear Defog Timer, Transfer Case Control Module Ignition, SIR Redundant Ignition, R K E Ignition. Fuel Sender Module FuseKircuit Breaker Usage Oxygen Sensor Heater, Exhaust Gas 5 Recirculation, Cam Sensor, CANN. Purge, Canister Vent Solenoid, Mass Airflow Sensor, Cam Shaft Sensor Blower Motor, Temperature Door 6 Motor, HI Blower Relay Coil Power Auxiliary Outlets, Assembly 7 Line Diagnostic Link Rear Window Defogger 8 PCMNCM Battery, Fuel Pump 9 PCM/VCM Ignition, Injectors, Crank 10 Sensor, Coil Driver Module Radio, Inside Rearview Mirror Map 11 Lamp, Overhead Console Reading Lamps, Rear Wiper, Rear Washer, Overhead Console Display Anti-Lock Braking System, VCM 12 IGN-3 Clock, Radio Battery, CD Player 13 A/C Compressor Battery Feed 14 Daytime Running Lamps; Fog 15 Lamps, Fog Lamp Relay FuseKircuit Breaker Usage 16 Turn Signals and Back-up Lamps, Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock Solenoid 17 Windshield Washer, Windshield Wiper Motor 18 Not Used 19 Electric Shift Transfer Case 20 Crank Relay, Air Bag Module 21 Not Used 22 Air Bag Module 23 Cluster Illumination, Radio Illumination, Heater Lamp,4WD Illumination, Chime Module,Fog Lamp Illumination, Rear Wiper Switch Illumination, Rear Defogger Switch Illumination, Liftglass Release Switch Illumination, Overhead Console Illumination PRNDL Power, 4L6OE Automatic 24 Transmission 6-61 Replacement Bulbs Quantity Number Halogen Headlamps, Sealed Beam 2 2E 1 Halogen Headlamps, Composite Low-Beam 3 9006 HB4 Halogen Headlamps, Composite High-Beam 2 9005 HB3 Tail and Stoplamps 4 3057 Front Sidemarker Lamps 2 194 Turn Signal Lamps -3 3157 NA Underhood Lamp 1 93 Visor Vanity Mirror Lamps 4 74 Overhead Console Reading Lamps -3 194 Lamps 6-62 Capacities and Specifications Engine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . “VORTEC” 4300 V6 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VINCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W 1-6-5-4-3-2 Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 at 4,400 rpm Thermostat Specification . . . . . . . . . . . 195°F(91°C) Spark Plug Gap . . . . . . . . . . 0.045 inches (0.114cm) Wheels and Tires Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Ib-ft (130 N-m) Tire Pressure . . . . . . See the Certificationflire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing, and are subjectto change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM truck dealer. Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12551472 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF52 A1 163C Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCVValve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV746C Automatic Transmission Filter Kit . . . . . . 24200796 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1-932 Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GF48 1 Front Windshield Wiper Blade . . . . . . . . . . Trico (20 inches/50.8cm) Backglass Wiper Blade . . . Trico (14 inched35.6 cm) 6-63 Capacities (Approximate) Cooling System* Automatic Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.7 quarts ( 1 I . 1 L) Manual Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.9 quarts ( 1 1.3 L) Crankcase* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.3 L) Automatic Transmission (Drain and Refill)" . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 quarts (4.7 L) Differential Fluid Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 pints (1.9 L ) Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 pints (1.2 L) Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 gallons (72 L) A/C Refrigerant . . 30 oz. or 2 lbs. (0.9 kg) of R- 134a *After refill,the level must be checked. Air Conditioning Refrigerants Not all air conditioning refrigerantsare the same. If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you're not sure, ask your GM dealer. Vehicle Dimensions* Wheelbase S/T10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100.5 inches (255.3 cm) S/T10506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107.0 1.nches (27 I .8 cm) Length S10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175.0 nches (444.5 cm) T10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175.4 nches (445.5 cm) S/T 10506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 I .5 inches (46 I .O cm) Height S10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.0 inches (167.6 cm) T10516 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.9 inches (170.0cm) S10506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65.9 inches (167.4 cm) T10506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67.0 inches (170.2 cm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67.8 inches ( 172.2 cm) Front Tread S Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.0 inches (139.6 cm) T Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57.3 inches (145.4 cm) Rear Tread S Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.7 inches (138.8 cm) T Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.1 inches ( 139.9 cm) *Figures reflect base equipment only. 6-64 Section 7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required foryour vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services toretain its safety, dependability and emission control performance. 7-2 7-4 7-5 7-5 7-6 7-6 Introduction Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services Short Trip/City Definition Short TripKity Intervals Long Trip/Highway Definition Long Trip/Highway Intervals 7-7 7-30 7-46 7-50 7-52 7-55 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule Part B: OwnerChecksandServices Part C: PeriodicMaintenanceInspections Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants Part E: Maintenance Record Introduction IMPORTANT: Your Vehicle and the Environment KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER .VELAND CHANGE RECOMMENDED protection 7-2 I Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition. please maintain your vehicle properly. How This Section is Organized The remainder of this section is dividedinto five parts: “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows what to have done and how often. Some of these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should let your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs. A CAUTION: Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, have a qualified technician do the work. “Part B: Owner Checks and Services”tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition. “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains important inspections that your GM dealer’s service department or another qualified servicecenter should perform. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some products GM recommends to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, ortheir equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done. “Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be sure to write it down in this part. This will help you determine when your next maintenance should be done. In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs. If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. 7-3 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don't know exactly how you'll drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few timesa week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot. dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work. to do errands or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their GM vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need more frequent checks and replacements than you'll find in the schedules in this section. So please read this section and note how you drive. If you.have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your GM dealer. This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. If you s 00 to your dealer for your service needs. you'll know that GM-trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts. 7-4 The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicleuses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. These schedules are for vehicles that: 0 carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle's Certification/Tire label. See "Loading Your Vehicle" in the Index. 0 are driven on reasonable road surfxes within legal driving limits. 0 are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See "Off-Road Driving With Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle'' in the Index. use the recommended fuel. See "Fuel" in the Index. Selecting the Right Schedule First you'll need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle. Here's how to decide which schedule to follow: Maintenance Schedule I Short TripKity Definition Short TripKity Intervals - ~- Follow the Short TripKity Maintenance Scheduleif any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle: Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing. Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic). You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off-road frequently. You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle. If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,taxi or other commercial application. One of the reasonsyou should follow this schedule fi you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engineoil to break down sooney: I Short TripKity Intervals Every 3,000 Miles (5000 km): Engine Oil and Filter Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Drive Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation. Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Front Wheel Bearing Repack (2WD only) (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement. Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transmission Service (severe conditions only). Every 60,000 Miles (100 000km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection. Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection. Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km): Cooling System Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first). These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Be sure tofollow thecomplete maintenanceschedule on thefollowing pages. Maintenance Schedule c Trip/Highway LongDefinition 1ILong Trip/Highway Intervals I Follow this maintenance schedule only if none of the conditions from the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule is true. Do not use this scheduleif the vehicle is used for trailertowing, driven in a dusty areaor used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedule for these conditions. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slowel: I 7-6 Every 7,500 Miles (12500 km): Engine Oil and Filter Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis Lubrication (or every12 months, whichever occurs first). Drive Axle Service.Tire Rotation. Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter Replacement. Air CleanerFilter Replacement. Front Wheel Bearing Repack (2WD only).(orat eachbrake relining, whichever occursfirst). Every 50,000 Miles (83000 km): Automatic Transmission Service (severe conditions only). Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. FuelTank, Cap and Lines Inspection. Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km):Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection. Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km):Cooling System Service (or every 60 months, whichever occursfirst). These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on thefollowing pages. Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles ( 166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the same intervals. The servicesshown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after150,000 miles (240 000 km). See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic Maintenance inspections” following. + A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance Inspection” in Part C of this schedule. ** Drive axle service (see“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the Index for proper lubricantto use): 0 Footnotes ? The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability priorto the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervalsand the maintenance be recorded. # Lubricate the front suspension,ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines,universal joints and brake pedal springs. Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refillat first engine oil change.At subsequent oil changes, check fluid level andadd fluid as needed. If driving in dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km). a Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add fluid as needed at every oil change. If driving in dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid andrefill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km). 0 More frequent lubrication may be required for heavy-duty or off-road use. /. . .- Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule . 3,000 Miles (5000 km) 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change 3 months, whichever occurs first). engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote * *.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED .' -I -. . "3 BY: components(or every 3 months; whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid E as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and i axle seals for leaking. (See footnote ** .) 0Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and Rotation" in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED , BY: I if:' 7-8 .. .' 0Lubricate chassis 0Lubricate chassis components (or every " E .< .,I I WW&% ,a% 9,000 Miles (15 000 km) DATE i ACTUAL,MILEAGE ' SERVICED BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). AI?E~nissioi-~ Control Sen7ic.t). Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. AI? Emissiorz Com-ol Sen~ico.(See footnote?. j 7-10 0Check redfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 18,000 Miles (30 000 km) 21,000 Miles (35 000 km) CJ Change 0Change engine oil and filter (or every engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Lubricate chassis components(or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). (See footnote#.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote *?) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 24,000 Miles (40 000 km) 27,000 Miles (45 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 17 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). Arz Emission Control Service. Arz Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote :$?j 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE 7-12 - ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Lubricate chassis components (,orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote *?) Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 33,000 Miles (55 000 km) 36,000 Miles (60 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). A n Emissiorz Colztrol Service. An Emissiorz Control Senice. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (,See footnote #.) 0Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) [7 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.> 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote ?) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 1 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs firstj. An Emissiorl Ccmtrol Service. Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid leveI and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (:Seefootnote ‘ V ) 17 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. A n Emission Cuntml Ser~~icr. (See footnote?.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y A 7-16 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 48,000 Miles (80 000 km) 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every IJ Change automatic transmission fluid and 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Lubricate chassis components (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote* *.) Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 1 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 O F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. (Continued) BY 7-17 1 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) (Continued) I 51,000 Miles (85 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months?whichever occurs first). AH E~nissionControl Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote :?) DATE 7-18 ACTUAL h'lILEAGE SERVICED B Y I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 54,000 Miles (90 000 km) 57,000 Miles (95 000 km) 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See ”Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional infQrmation. (See footnote +.) Cl Lubricate chassis components(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) 0Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I 7-19 I Short TripKity MaintenanceSchedule 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) CI Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (,orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote** .) 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). Inspect engine accessory drive belt. c]Replace fuel filter. Afz Enzissiorz Contml Sen?ice. (See footnote?.) 7-20 I 0Replace air cleaner filter. AI! Ewission Control Service. Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. AI? Ewis.sim Comol Service. (See footnote?.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY. 63,000 Miles.(€OS000 knt) [7 Change engine oil and fi3ter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. $0Lubricate chassis components(or every I ~~ ~ ~ Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 69,000 Miles (115 000 km) 72,000 Miles (120 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Errlission. Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) I DATE 7-22 I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED B Y 1 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Check readfront axlef llid ~ le.vel andadd fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote* *.) 3 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service, 0Lubricate chassis components(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) CI For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 7-23 I Short TripKity MaintenanceSchedule 1 ~~ 78,000 Miles (130 000 km) 81,000 Miles (135 000 km) 0Change 0Change engine oil and filter (or every engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) CI Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). Arz Emission Control Service. c] Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote ‘?) DATE 7-24 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 84,000 Miles (140 000 km) 87,000 Miles (145 000 km) 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. t]Lubricate chassisComponents (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). I7 Lubricate chassis components (orevery (See footnote#.) Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand Rotation” in the Index for properrotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: ~ ~ I 1 3 months, whichever occursfirst). (See footnote #.) [7 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axlesealsfor leaking. (See footnote **.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-25 1 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) An Emissiorl. Control Ser-tpice. Replace air cleaner filter. Replace fuel filter. Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote ‘?) @ For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining. whichever occursfirst). An Emission C o m d Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) C ‘ I 7-26 DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ]SERVICED BYI ~~~ ~ ~~ rShort Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 93,000 Miles (155 000 km) Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) El Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) I 96,000 Miles (160 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#.) Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand Rotation” in the Index for properrotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 7-27 1 ShortTrip/CityMaintenanceSchedule I 99,000 Miles (165 000 km) 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Inspect spark plug wires. 3 months, whichever occurs first). Arz Emission Control Serlice. 0 Replace spark plugs. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) I DATE 7-28 ACTUAL MILEAGE An Emissiorl Control Service. SERVICED BY. A n Emission CmtroI Service. 0Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or ~nountainousterrain. Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule I 150,000 Miles (240 000 km) 0Drain, flush and refill cooling system - When doing frequent trailer towing. (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under- any of these conditions, thefluid and filter do not require changing. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. 0Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (Pcv)valve. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED An Emission Control Service. BY I DATE 1 ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY:l 7-29 The services shown in this schedule up to 100.000 miles ( 166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles ( 166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150.OOO miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after 150.0OO miles (240 000 km ). # Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering See "Owner Checks and Services" and "Periodic Maintenance Inspections" following. rotation. See "Brake System Inspection" under "Periodic Maintenance Inspections" in Part C of this schedule. Footnotes ** Drive axle service (see "Recommended Fluids and -f- The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item. will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle's useful life. We. however. urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. 7-30 linkage and transfer case shift linkage. parking brake cable guides. propshaft splines. universal joints and brake pedal springs. + A good time to check your brakes is during tire Lubricants" in the Index for proper lubricant to use): Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check fluid level and add fluid as needed. Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add fluid as needed at every engine oil change. More frequent lubrication may be required for heavy-duty or off-road use. I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) 0Change engine oiland filter (or every 17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (orevery 12 months, whichever occursfirst). (See footnote#.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) I I DATE 1 I ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-31 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (,or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Co~rr-01 Senlicp. CI Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote#. ) Check readfront axle fluid level and add tluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote ‘M .) 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 22,500 Miles (37 500 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 7-33 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) 0Change engine o i l and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Alz Emission Control Srl-\,im. Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote ‘?) 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relinine, whichever occurs first). 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) G Replace fuel filter. 1-11] ~ I 1 1 i s s i o nC017fld ~er-\l;c~t.. (See footnote?.) 0.Replace air cleaner filter. A17 E~H~.F.Y;OII Control Sc.l-1-ic.c.. L., DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 1 Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 37,500 Miles (62 500 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). tT] Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (,Seefootnote +.) An Ewissiorz Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote ?) I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-35 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months. whichever occurs first). Ar1 Ernissio/z Cor~tmlSenvice. C I Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (‘Seefootnote V ) DATE 7-36 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) El Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. I If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. 7-37 I Long Tripmighway MaintenanceSchedule I 52,500 Miles (87 500 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months. whichever occurs first). An Emissiorl Control Service. 0 Lubricate chassis components (or every I2 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check rearhont axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote W . ) 7-38 0Rotate tires. Se.e “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I Long TripMighway Maintenance Schedule 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. 0Replace air cleaner filter. Atz Emission Corzrt-olService. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months. whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote :?) 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and Rotation" in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 0 Inspect ensins accessory drive belt. (See footnote?.) An Emission Control Service. 0:Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Eruission Ccmt-d Service. (See footnote-f..) I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED B Y I I 67,500 Miles (I12 500 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Ernissiorz Corzfrol Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote ‘B *.) DATE 7-40 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Ai1 Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) c]Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote *?) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-41 82,500 Miles (137 500 km) U Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emissiorl Contrd Service. Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months. whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote *?) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire rnspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Replace fuel filter. 12 months, whichever occurs first). A I ZEmission Control Service. (See footnote?.) An Elnission Control Service. Replace air cleaner filter. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 17 Check rearlfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) [7 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). AFZEmissiorz Control Service. Cl Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 7-43 I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule I 97,500 Miles (162 500 km) 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) 0Chanqe engine oil and filter (or every 0Inspect spark plug wires. L. 12 months. whichever occurs first). ,411 Emission AJIEmis.sio/l Coutrol Sen9ice. C'otItrd Service. 0Replace spark plugs. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every A J IEmissior1 Co~~tr-ol Service. 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote '?) 0Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and Rotation" in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE 7-44 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED HI': 0Change automatic transmission fluid and I filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90" F (32°C) orhigher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule I50,OOO Miles (240 000 km) If you donot use your vehicle under anyof these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve. An Emission Control Sewice. I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I 0Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 7-45 Part B: Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check Listed below are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle. Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@ coolant mix if necessary. See "Engine Coolant" in the Index for further details. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones. as shown in Part D. At Each Fuel Fill Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessarv. See "Windshield Washer Fluid" in the Index for furthkr details. At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Engine Oil Level Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See "Tires" in the Index for further details. Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See "Engine Oil" in the Index for further details. Cassette Deck Service 7-46 Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play. See "Audio Systems" in the Index for further details. At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety beltsystem from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also look forany opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.) Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades, Cleaning” in the Index. Manual Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See “Manual Transmission’’ in the Index. Check for leaks. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired if needed. Automatic Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level;add if needed. See “Automatic Transmission” in the Index. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed. Hydraulic Clutch System Check Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See “Hydraulic Clutch Fluid”in the Index. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired at once. At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D. Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all body door and fuel door hinges, rear compartment hinges, latchesand locks including the glove box, console doorsand the body hood and any moving seat hardware. Lubricatethe hood safety lever pivot and prop rod pivot. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. 7-47 Starter Switch Check A CAUTION: When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you orothers could be injured. Follow the steps below. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see ”Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal. and be ready to turn off the engine imnlediately if it starts. 3. On automatic transmission vehicles. try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in any other position. your vehicle needs service. On manual transmission vehicles. put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine. The starter’shoLlld work only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t pushed all the way down. your vehicle needs service. 7-48 Brake-”kansmission Shift Interlock(BTSI) Check (Automatic Transmission) I A CAUTION: When you are doing thischeck, the vehicle could move suddenly.If it does, youor others could be injured. Follow the steps below. ’. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked o n a level surface. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see ”Parking Brake’‘ in the Index if necessary). NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3 . With the engine off. turn the key to the R U N position, but don‘t start the engine. Without applying the regular brake. try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service. Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position. 0 0 With an automatic transmission, the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever isin PARK (P). With a manual transmission, the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in REVERSE (R). On vehicles with a key release button, try to turn the key to LOCK without pressing the button. The key should turn to LOCK only when you press the key button. On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK. Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission PARK (P)Mechanism Check I A CAUTION: ~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ~~ When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or otherscould be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake atonce should thevehicle begin to move. ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ _ ~ ~~ _ ~ _ _ ~ ~ ~ ~ Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the engine running andtransmission in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: With the engine running, shiftto PARK (P). Then release all brakes. 7-49 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed below are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance. each spring and fall). You should let your GM dealer's service department or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at cme. Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a CM service manual. See "Service and Owner Publications" in the Index. Steering, Suspensionand Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front m d rear suspension and steering system for datna_ced.loose or missing parts. signs of wear or lack o f lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks. chafing. ctc. Clean and then inspect the drive axle hoot seals for dm~age.tears or leakage. Replace seal5 if nccessq'. Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged. missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes. loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See "Engine Exhaust" in the Index. Radiator and HeaterHose Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Throttle Linkage Inspection Inspect the throttle linkaze for interference or binding. and for damage or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any cables that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables. Drive AxleService Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle sealsfor leaking. Transfer Case (All-WheelDrive) Inspection Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary. Check vent hose at transfer case for kinksand proper installation. nansfer Case (Four-wheel Drive) Inspection Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front axle and transfer case and add lubricantwhen necessary. Check vent hose at transfer case for kinksand proper installation. More frequent lubrication may be required on off-road use. Brake System Inspection (Two-Wheeland Four-wheel Drive) Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers,parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking. Brake System Inspection(All-Wheel-Drive) Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking. 7-51 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtained from your GM dealer. USAGE Engine Oil Engine Coolant FLUIDLUBRICANT Engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines ”Starburst” symbol of the proper viscosity. To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see “Engine Oil” in the Index. 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and use only GM Goodwrench@ DEX-COOL or Havoline@DEX-COOL coolant. See “Engine Coolant“ in the Index. TM 7-52 USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Coolant Supplement Sealer GM Part No. 3634621 or equivalent with a complete flush and refill. Hydraulic Brake System Delco Supreme 1 1a Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967 or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part System No. 12345347 or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint, lOSOOl7 - 1 quart. or equivalent). USAGE Manual Transmission FLUIDLUBRICANT Synchromesh Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 12345349 or equivalent). Automatic Transmission DEXRON@-I11Automatic Transmission Fluid. Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Pu oselubricant, Superlube% (GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent). Chassis Lubrication Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985 or equivalent)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB. USAGE Transfer Case DEXRON@-I11Automatic Transmission Fluid. Windshield Washer Solvent GM Optikleen@Washer ~ Front Wheel Bearings Differential, Front and Rear Axle Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category GC or GC-LB (GM Part No. 105 1344 or equivalent). Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 1052271) or SAE 8OW-90 GL-5 Gear Lubricant. FLUIDLUBRICANT Solvent (GM PartNo. 10515 15) or equivalent. ~~~ Transfer Case Shift Lever, Propeller Shaft Slip Splinesand Universal Joints Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985 or,equivalent)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI ## 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Clutch Pushrod to ClutchFork Joint Chassis lubricant (GMPart No. 12377985 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Constant Velocity Universal Joint Chassis lubricant(GM Part No. 12377985 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB. 7-53 FLUIDLUBRICANT Hood Latch Assembly, Pivots, Spring Anchor and Release Pawl Lubriplate lubricant aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Hood and Door Hinges Multi-purpose lubricant. Superlube’ (GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent). Tailgate Mounted Spare Tire Carrier (if equipped), Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Points and Hinges Multi-pu oselubricant, % (GM I Part Superlube No. 1234624 1 or equivalent). 7-54 USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT Weatherstrip Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. 12345579 or equivalent). Weatherstrip Squeaks Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube‘ (GM Part No. 1234624 1 or equivalent). See “Replacement Parts” in the Index for recommended replacement filters, valves and spark plugs. Part E: Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer readingand who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional informationfrom “Owner Checks and Services’’ or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following recordpages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them. Maintenance Record DATE ODOMETER READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED 7-55 Maintenance Record 7-56 Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section alsotells you how to obtain service publications andhow to report any safety defects. 8-2 8-4 8-4 8-5 8-5 8-7 8-8 8-9 Customer Satisfaction Procedure Address for Writing to Chevrolet/Geo Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Program Phone Number for RoadsideAssistance Canadian Roadside Assistance Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation BBB Autoline Information ~ ~ 8-10 8-10 8-1 1 8-11 8-1 1 8- 12 8- 13 Warranty Information Reporting Safety Defectsto the United States Reporting Safety Defects to Canada Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Ordering Service Publicationsin Canada How to Order Service Publications Order Form for Service Publications 8-1 Customer SatisfactionProcedure Chevrolet dealers have the facilities, trained technicians and up-to-date information to promptly address any concerns you may have. However, if a concern has not been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the following steps: STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the Sales, Serviceor Parts Manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the General Manager. 'I ....."--- c 8-2 I STEP TWO -- If after contacting a memberof dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolvedby the dealership without further help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling 1-800-222- 1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). For help outside of the United States and Canada, call the following numbers as appropriate: In Mexico: (525) 625-3256 0 0 In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135 (English) or 1-800-75 1-4136 (Spanish) In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009 In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122 In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763- 1315 In other overseas locations, call GM International Product Center in Canada at:(905) 644-41 12. In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) 8-3 For prompt assistance, please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative: 0 Your name, address, home and business telephone numbers 0 Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.) Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage Nature of concern 0 0 0 We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Chevrolet, address your inquiry to: Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 7047 Troy, MI 48007-7047 In Canada. write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre. 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L 1H 8P7 8-4 Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for addresses of GM Overseas offices. When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership, using the dealer’s facilities, equipmentand personnel. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern. Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (,TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Program Roadside Assistanceis available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872). This toll-free numberwill provide you over-the-phone roadside assistancewith minor mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone, our advisorshave access to a nationwide network of dealer recommended service providers. Roadside membershipis free, however some services may incur costs. Roadside offers two levelsof service to the customer, Basic Care and Courtesy” Care: a a a a To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitmentto customer satisfaction, Chevroletis excited to announce the establishment of the Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Center. As the owner of a 1997 Chevrolet/Geo, membership in Roadside Assistance is free. Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA Free towing for warranty repairs Basic over-the-phone technical advice Available dealer servicesat reasonable costs (ie., wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glass repair, etc.) ROADSIDE Courtesy 0 Care PROVIDES: Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined above) Plus: FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer from a legal roadway) 0 FREE LocksrnithKey Service (when keys are lost on the road or locked inside) 0 FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road) 0 FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road) 0 FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road) Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for customers needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty to eligible purchasers of 1997 Chevrolet/Geo passenger car and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer for details.) Note: Colmesy Care is available to Retail and Retail Lease Customers operating 1997 and newer ChevroletlGeo vehicles for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000km), whichever occurs first.All Corlrtes! Curr services must be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer Service Management. Basic Cure and Corwtesy Care are not part of or included i n the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to modify or discontinue Basic Care and Cmrtesy Ccm at any time. 8-6 Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure For complete program details, see your ChevroledGeo dealer to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure. inside your owner information portfolio forfull program details. The Roadside Assistance Centeruses companies that will provide you with quality and priority service. When Canadian Roadside Assistance roadside services are required, our advisorswill explain Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive any payment obligations that may be incurred for Roadside Assistance program accessiblefrom anywhere utilizing outside services. in Canada or the United States. Please referto the For prompt assistance when calling, please havethe separate brochure provided by the dealer orcall following available to give to the advisor: 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 0 License plate number Vehicle color 0 Vehicle location Telephone number where you can be reached 0 Vehicle mileage Description of problem Courtesy Transportation Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for customers needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty to retail purchasers of 1997 Chevrolet/Geo passenger cars and light duty trucks (please see your selling dealer for details). Courtesy Transportation includes: 0 One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair completed during the same day. 0 0 U p to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance for any overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR Up to $30 maximum daily cab. bus or other transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR Up t o S I O daily tuel allowance. for rides provided by amother person t i .e.. friend. neighbor. etc.) in lieu of rental for any c n m i g h t warranty repair up to five days. Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be adtnit7istt'red by your Chevrolet/Geo dealer ser\.ice tnanaFement. Claim amounts should reflect a l l actual 8-8 COSlS. Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation is not part of the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet/Geo reserves the right to make any changes or discontinueCourtesy Transportation at any time without notification. For additional program details, contact your Chevrolet/Geo dealer. Some state insuranceregulations make it impractical to rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet will reimburse up to $30/day for documented transportation you receive. For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, interim transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details. TheRoadside Assistance program is available only in the United States and Canada. In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for information on Courtesy Transportation. GM Participation inan Alternative Dispute ResolutionProgram BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to is available settle automotive disputes. This program This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Canadian ownersrefer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Informationbooklet for information onthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). General Motorsreserves the right to change eligibility limitationsand/or to discontinue its participation in this program. free of charge to customerswho currently own or lease a GM vehicle. Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if a situation arises where you feel your concernhas not been adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this section is very successful. There may be instances where an impartial third party can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement regarding vehicle repairsor interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE. If you are not satisfied after followingthe Customer Satisfaction Procedure,you may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the following address: BBB AUTO LINE Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203- 1804 Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100 To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and a statementof the nature of your complaint. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and other factors. 8-9 We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary. If this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduled where eligible customers may present their case to an impartial third-party arbitrator. The arbitrator will make a decision which you may accept or reject. If you accept the decision. GM will be bound by that decision. The entire dispute resolution procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the time you file a claim until a decision is made. Some state laws may require you to use this program before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program or in the courts. For further information, contact the BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020. Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in-jury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an investigation. and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or General Motors. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington. D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 8-10 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: Transport Canada Box 8880 Ottawa, OntarioK 1G 352 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation likethis, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please callus at 1-800-222- 1020 or write: In Canada, please callus at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manualsand other service literature are available for purchase for all current and past model General Motors vehicles. The toll-free telephonenumber for ordering information in Canada is 1-800-668-5539. Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 7047 Troy, Michigan 48007-7047 8-11 1997 CHEVROLET/GEO SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATH The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling o the Service Publication Order Form in thisbook and mailing it in with your check, money order, or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.) CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1997 CHEVROLET/GEO SERVICE MANUALS Service Manuals have thediagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00 OWNER’S INFORMATION Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about tl vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenanct Schedule for all models. TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE,TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments and specifications for the 1997 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $40.00 In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00 SERVICE BULLETINS Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. PLEASE COMPLETE THEORDER FORM SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $10.00 CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle. OR ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-782-4356 Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCarcCDiscover Orders willbe mailed within O.days 1 of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal service. If further informatlon IS needed, wrlte to the address s own below or call 1-800-782-4356.Materialcannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return information within30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied against the original order. R ORDER TOLL FREE (NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only) 1-800-782-4356 (Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST) FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927 PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER ITEM DESCRIPTION I , VEHICLE MODEL NAME - - YEAR 1997 $90.00 1997 $40.00 Owner’s Manual In Portfolio 1997 $15.00 Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio 1997 $10.00 Mail completed order form to: HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 For purchases outside U.S.A. please writeto the above address for quotation. P.O. BOX NUMBERS) (STATE) (CITY) . . DAYTlMf TELEPHONE NO. CODE) (ZIP 0 AREA CODE iE-ORD97 Check or Money Order payable to Helm, Inc. (USA funds only do not send cash.) ‘(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.) I TOTAL MATERIAL TOTAL PRICE I Michigan Purchasers add 6% sales tax P A 0MasterCard Canadian Postage See Note Below Y VISA M Discover E Account Number: N Expiration 1 7 Checkhere if yourbillingaddress is different fromyour shipping Date mo/yr: address shown. T Note to Canadian Customers:All listed pricesare quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents lm (AITEMION) (STREET ADDRESS-NO PRICE EACH* Service Manual Car & Light Truck Transmission Unit Repair NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or companyname, and also the name of the personto whose attention the shipment should be sent. (CUSTOMERS NAME) QTYm ml m l CUSTOMER SIGNATURE plus the are to make checks payablein U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 U.S. order processing. 4% NOTES 8-14 Section 9 Index Accessory Power Outlets ........................ 2-63 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3 3-20 Adding Sound Equipment ........................ Add-on Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Adding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 1-22 How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21. 2-73 Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 1-23 What Makes it Intlate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 1-23 When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Alignment and Balance, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 2-23, 6-21 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Antenna. Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 2-76, 4-7 6-49 Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrest. Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transmission Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axle Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 2-56 2-61 3-6 2-20 7-47 6-14 2-18 7-49 2-18 2-15 6-22 6-20 Backglass Wipers. Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 2-73 ChargeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Replacement. Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3. 5-5 BBB Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 9-1 Blizzard. Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 2-29 Brake. Parking ................................. Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 Brakes Adjustment .................................. 6-32 Anti-Lock ................................... 4- 7 6-28 Master Cylinder .............................. PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 9 Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 4- 6 Braking ........................................ Braking in Emergencies ........................... 4-9 2-13 Break-In, NewVehicle .......................... Brightness Control .............................. 2-47 BTSICheck ................................... 7-48 6-33, 6-62 Bulb Replacement ......................... Canadian Roadside Assistance .................... 8-7 Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63, 6-64 CarbonMonoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9.2-34.4-49, 4-50 Cargocover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Cargo Tie Downs ............................... 2-58 Center Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 4-42 CertificatiodTire Label .......................... Chains Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 6-48 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Changing a Flat Tire............................. 5-23 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73 Check Gages Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . :. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47 Chemical Paint Spotting .......................... 6-56 ChildRestraints ................................ 1-37 Center Seat Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position........... 1-39 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 Where Not to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 WheretoPut ................................ 1-37 CigaretteLighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 6-59 Circuit Breakers and Fuses ....................... 6-13 Cleaner.Air ................................... Cleaning Aluminum Wheels ............................ 6-55 Fabric ...................................... 6-50 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53 6-49 Inside of Your Vehicle ......................... Instrumentpanel ............................. 6-52 Leather ..................................... 6-52 Outside of Your Vehicle ........................ 6-54 Stains ...................................... 6-51 Tires ....................................... 6-55 Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Weatherstrips ................................ 6-53 Wheels ...................................... 6-45 Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 Climate Control System ........................... 3-2 Clock. Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Clutch. Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 19 Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 1 CompactDisc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 5-35 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14. 6-23 Coolant Heater. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 17 Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 CruiseControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- I Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Damage. Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Damage. Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 DeadBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Defects. Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- IO. 8- 1 I DefensiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 3-5 Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Dimensions.Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 DomeLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Drive. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Drive Axle Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 OnCurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Rainy Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Snowy and Icy Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Through Deep Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 Driving On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 E a s y Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Equipment, Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20. ElectricalSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Endgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ManualRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RemoteRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 6-58 6-58 2-9 2-11 2-10 2-11 9-3 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FanNoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engineoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kind to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust.Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Express-Down Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior Metal Parts. Protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 2- 17 7-46 3-76 2-34 5-22 6-58 7-46 5-12 2-35 6-63 2-15 6-9 6-10 6- 12 6-9 6-10 2-79 6-13 6-12 2-34 3-36 6-55 F a b r i c Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50 Fifth Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 FillingYourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Fi 1ter Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Remote Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 12 9-4 Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 6-56 Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First Gear Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 5-2 Flashers . Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat Tire. Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64. 7-52 FogLampSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Fourth Gear, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Four-wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 6-21.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 French Language Manual FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 2-48 Front ivlap Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47. 2-5 1.6-38 Front Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 Front Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 FrontTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 Gages Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 2-79 2-81 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 1 GasCap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 GearPositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42.. Guide en Franpis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 6-33 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 2-45 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 2-39 HighLow Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 6-59 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 4-35 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 4-48 Hitches. Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- I9 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 6.41.7.46 Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Inspections 7-51 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 Front Drive Axle Boot Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 7-50 Radiator and Heater Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 7-50 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Throttle Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 2-69 Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Jacking Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 K e y in the Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Key Lock Cylinders Service ...................... 7-47 Key Release Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 2-6 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 9-5 Labels Certificatioflire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 6-60 Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SafetyBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 Service Parts Identification ..................... 6-58 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58 2-45 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Front Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 2.47. 2.51 Front Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 2-46 OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Latches. Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Leaving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-32 Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 Lights Air Bag Readiness ....................... 1-2 1. 2.73 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.76.4.7 Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 2-73 ChargingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CheckGages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 Daytime Running Lamps Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 Gate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 Safety Belt Reminder ...................... 1-9. 2-72 Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 Shitt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22, 2-80 Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 2-23 Locking Rear A x l e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 9-6 Locks ......................................... 2-4 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 7-47 Key Lock Cylinder Service ..................... 2-5 PowerDoor .................................. Rear Door Security ............................. 2-5 Steering Column Park Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Lubricants and Fluids ....................... 6.64. 7.52 Lubrication Service. Body ........................ 7-47 2-59 Luggagecarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3. 1-4 LumbarControls ............................ Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55 7-1 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Long Trip/Highway ....................... 7.6.7.30 Owner Checks and Services ..................... 7-46 Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52 Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 7.57. .7 Short Trip/City ............................ Maintenance. Underbody ......................... 6-56 Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...................... 2-77 ManualFront Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 ManualLumbar Support .......................... 1-3 Manual Transmission Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside Daymight Rearview ..................... Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VisorVanity ................................. Model Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction Lever ............................. 6-4 2-49 2-50 2-49 2-49 2-62 vi 4-35 2-38 N e t . Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Neutral Automatic Transmission ....................... Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Vehicle “Break-In” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 2- 19 2-22 2- 13 4-28 6-63 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 Off-RoadDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 1 1 0il.Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Opener. Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Ordering Owner and Smite Publications . . . . . . . 8- 1 I. 8- 12 Outside Mirror Manual Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Overdrive. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Overheating Engine ............................. 5-12 Owner Checks and Services ....................... 7-46 Owner Publications ........................ 8- 1 1. 8. 12 P a i n t Spotting. Chemical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Automatic Transmission ....................... Shifting Into ................................. Shifting Out of ............................... Parking AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Mechanism Check ....................... Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On Hills with a Trailer ......................... Over Things That Burn ........................ Your Vehicle. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Accessory Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Control Mirror ........................ Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powerseat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lumbar Controls .............................. 6-56 2-18 2-30 2-33 2-12 2-29 7-49 2-12 4-52 2-34 2-33 4-12 4-44 7-50 2-63 2-5 2-49 4-9 6-26 2-36 1-3 1-4 Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Problems on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Publications. Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 I . 8- 12 Radiator. Adding Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 19 Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- I9 Radios AM-FM Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Cassette Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20? 7-46 Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8. 3- 10 Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 13 Theft-Deterrent Feature. CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 17 Rain. Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Safety Belt Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1 Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 1-7 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Window WasheriWi per . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 RearSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -49 1-4 Reclining Front Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 6-64.7-52 Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Recovery Tank . Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- I6 Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 - 9-8 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 6-63 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 10. 8-11 Restraints Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 1-47 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 1-6 Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 Reverse Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 2-22 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RightFront Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Rocking Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Rotation. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 1-8 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Center Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Center Rear Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 . 1-44 1-13 Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HowtoWear Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 . 1-33 Lap-Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13. 1.28 Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.I2 Rear Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1 Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Replacing After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 WhyThey Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Safety Defects. Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 10. 8- I...1 Safety Warnings and Symbols ....................... III Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Seatback 1-6 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RecliningFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Seats and Restraint Systems ........................ 1-1 Second Gear 2-20 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 1 Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 1 Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 1. 8. 12 Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58 Service Work. Doing Your Own .................... 6-2 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Sheet MetalDamage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22. 2.80 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 8. 2.21 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 OutofPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 SignalingTurns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.63. 6.64 Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Stains. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Steering In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Steering Column Park Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49 Steering Wheel. Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Storage.Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 SunVisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 SupplementalInflatableRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Symbols. Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Taillamp Bulb Replacement ....................... 6-37 TapePlayerCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Temperature and Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 .. . 9-9 Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 THEFTLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 6-26 Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Third Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 1 Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 3-6 Time. Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48 Tires Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 6-44 BuyingNew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41. 7-46 Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 6-46 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 Uniform Quality Grading Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44 When It’s Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44 TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 2-32 TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque, Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32, 6-63 4-45 Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing, Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 5-7 Towing YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 TI( 9-10 4-52 Driving on Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 Driving with a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance When Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Parking on Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Tongueweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 4-48 Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 2-26 Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Fluid Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 6-18 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitters . Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Transportation. Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Trip. Before Leaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 8-4 TTYUsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Underhood Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Universal Transmitter ............................ Erasing Channels ............................. Operation ................................... Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rolling Code Openers ......................... Used Replacement Wheels ........................ 2-64 2-66 2-66 2-65 2-66 6-47 Vanity Mirror Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . VehicleControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Damage Warnings .......................... VehicleDimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Identification Number ..................... Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visors. Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38 4-6 iv 6-64 6-58 4-42 6-33 w a r n i n e Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning Eights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................ WashingYourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 2-72 8- I O 6-27 6-54 v 3-4 2-62 2-74 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Alignment ............................... Wheel Nut Torque ......................... 5.32. WheelReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows Express-Down ............................... LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swing-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid Level Check ............................ WindshieldWiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bladecheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BladeReplacement ........................... Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring.Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 6-46 6.63 6-46 2-36 2-37 2-36 2-36 2-37 2-40 6-27 7-46 2-40 7-47 6-38 6-59 2-41 4-37 6-59 5-7 9-11 Service Station Checkpoints TIRES P6-41 ENGINE COOLANT RECOVERY TANK P6-23 ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK P6-9 4 SECONDARY HOOD RELEASE P6-6 I 1 I f 1 I II \I WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID P6-27 HOOD RELEASE P6-6 FUEL DOOR P6-5 For detailed information, refer to the page number listed, or see the index in the back of the owner's manual. 9-12